Copyright: © GPSoftware, Brisbane, 2005


DEFAULT TOPIC TITLE
This is a context-sensitive Help file that is called from an application.


Displays a selection of images available for internal Opus commands and allows you to select the primary image.


Displays a selection of images available for internal Opus commands and allows you to select the secondary image.


Shows an icon image in the button.


Activates a second mouse-over image displayed when you move the mouse over the button.


Selects between showing a large or small image in the button. This setting is local to this button and can be overridden by a global setting in the Toolbar section in Customize.


The name to be displayed for this object.


Shows the text label in the button according to the following setting. This setting is local to this button and can be overridden by a global setting in the Toolbar section in Customize.


Controls where the text for the button label is displayed if activated.


Enter your input in this field.


The popup tooltip to be displayed when the mouse hovers over this object.


Defines the shortcut key or Hotkey to activate this button if any. Simply activate this field and press the key or key combination desired. You may use any combination of any single key including function keys edit keys, keypad keys or normal keys either alone or in combination with qualifier keys including Shift, Ctrl, Alt, and Windows keys.


Clears any defined Hotkey combination.


Displays the Opus command function and any arguments or the application program selected for the button.


Browse for an application program to run from this button.


Sets the home or program folder when launching an application.


Browse for a folder.


Select the type of Window in which to run this program.


Enter your input in this field.


If not set elsewhere, allows you to choose the type of highlighting you wish to use for this button. Note: A hierarchy applies - the global setting in Preferences overrides the setting in the Customize -Toolbar settings which overrides this setting in the button itself.


Select the foreground color.


Select the background color.


Overrides selected individual colors used for the button display. Otherwise the colors come from Toolbar settings or from Preferences, in that order.


Enter the extra Arguments for this function.


Select to run an internal Opus function or an external DOS command or batch file.


Use the smallest width for the menu to fit the text.


Provides extended edit functions for the function display below.


The higher the value the stronger the effect will be.


Displays a list of the Arguments available for this command or function.


Browse for an application program or a batch file.


Do not display the 3D border that normally appears when the button is highlighted.


Click this button to make your choice.


When a Lister window is activated with a mouse click in the file area, this option allows immediate selection of a file which was clicked. Otherwise, the first click will simply activate the Lister as the Source and a second click will be required to select a specific file. You may find it inconvenient to have the file selected automatically when you activate the Lister. If so, un-check this option.


When switching an existing Lister into dual file display mode, set the new file display to Source mode. Otherwise the new file display opens in Destination mode.


Allows you to drop files directly into a sub-folder by dragging the items over the sub-folder. The files (and folders) will be copied or moved according to the settings in File Types action for Drag and Drop. The alternative (and possibly safer) method is to require a qualifier (SHIFT, Alt or Ctrl) key to be held down before the files will be copied to the sub-folder. When using a qualifier, Opus will perform the drop action as defined in the File Types for that type of file (or folder) and the specific qualifier key.


Enables the extra buttons in the inner file display border. These new buttons allow you to swap the paths between source and destination displays or quickly duplicate the current display in the other side of a dual file display Lister.


Enables the display of an advanced popup tool tip called 'InfoTips' which can display user-configurable information, including thumbnail images, for any type of file or group. Info Tips can be defined for common types of files from the Opus Content Type system in Preferences, and in the File Type Editor.


Choose which display mode to show Info Tips.


Choose which types of folders will show Info Tips. For example, for speed, you may like to turn Info Tips off for all but local hard drives.


The display of popup InfoTips can be triggered from the keyboard by holding the control key down for at least this delay time ( the standard tooltip "trigger time" is usually 500 ms).


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Enables the display of popup quick navigation buttons on the sides of the file display if required. These buttons provide a quick method of performing a back or parent action rather then moving the mouse to the Toolbar or inner file display buttons or using a hot key.


Enables the display of popup quick navigation buttons on the sides of the file display if required. These buttons provide a quick method of performing a back or parent action rather then moving the mouse to the Toolbar or inner file display buttons or using a hot key.


This setting controls the time delay before the slide-out navigational buttons will appear.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Changes the behavior of the up button in inner file display border. The BACK parameter can now be used in conjunction with the UP parameter to combine their behaviors. Go UP BACK causes the parent folder to be read, just as for UP, but the file selection and scroll offset information in the cache will be used if the parent folder has been visited before, just as for BACK.


If this is enabled, the focus will be given to the item that ends up in the same position (relative to the top of the Lister) as the old focus entry. The net effect of this is that the list will not have to scroll to keep the focus item in view.


Normally Opus uses a single-click to highlight files and a double-click to open them. This option activates a mode similar to single-click in Explorer where moving the mouse over the file highlights and a single click opens the file.


Lets you click on the path elements in the file display border to quickly browse to a parent folder.


Makes path elements in the file display border active only when the file display is set to source.


Check your desired options.


Lists the fonts available in the system.


Choose from the list of styles available for the selected font.


Choose from the list of sizes available for the selected font.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes.


Asks if you wish to delete the selected files before starting the delete process.


Asks if you wish to delete the selected file before each file is deleted.


Asks if you wish to delete the selected folder before each folder is deleted


Counts the files in all selected folders before starting the delete. This will slow the delete process but allows you to see the exact number of files and folders plus the total byte count before any files or folders are deleted.


Files can be marked as read-only to prevent them being accidentally deleted. This option overrides this check and deletes such files automatically. It can be useful if you wish to recursively delete a large number of files and folders, some of which may have read-only attributes set.


Opus can delete to the Windows Recycle Bin or can delete the files immediately. If you delete to the Recycle Bin you can recover (undo) the files at a later date unless you have subsequently emptied the Recycle Bin. Choose the required setting. WARNING: Files NOT sent to the Recycle Bin cannot be recovered and are lost permanently.


Activate the Opus File Filter when deleting files from the current and selected folders. This allows you to selectively delete only those files from the current and selected folders which match a given set of criteria. For example, you may wish to recursively delete only files which have changed after a certain date, or which are of a specific type such as .jpg etc.


Opens the Windows Recycle Bin in a new Lister.


Allows you to configure the properties of the Windows Recycle Bin.


Empties the Windows Recycle Bin.


Make secure wipe the default delete when NOT deleting to the recycle bin. (Deleting to the recycle bin still remains insecure). Leave this off unless needed since secure deletes requires multiple overwrites of the file before deletion and this process is quite slow. (Note, you can access secure delete on a file-by-file basis using the new Secure Wipe command. This function is available in Customize->Commands->File Commands and is also available by default as the middle-mouse button function for the Delete button on the default Toolbar.)


Option for the number of overwrite passes for each file. Files are actually deleted by overwriting with a specific random pattern algorithmically chosen according to the number of passes selected. Three passes is recommended to be secure enough for most users.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Displays a list of the Favorite locations you have defined as well as any SmartFavorites which have been automatically added by Opus. Use the buttons on the right to organize your Favorites in the order you require.


Adds the current Source Lister path or a selected path to the Favorites list.


Deletes the selected Favorite from the list.


Allows you to rename the selected Favorite.


Creates a new folder in the Favorites list.


Moves the selected Favorite up in the list.


Moves the selected Favorite down in the list.


Imports Favorites from the Windows / Internet Explorer system files. You may selectively import file and folder shortcuts, FTP links, HTML and other links into the current folder or a sub-folder of your choice.


Sorts the list into alphabetical (lexical) descending order.


Displays the path to the Favorite.


Browse for a new path for the selected Favorite.


Automatically sort new entries to add them in alphabetical order. Otherwise, add new items to the end of the list.


Adds a separator at this position between the adjacent items.


Allows you to define a hot key to instantly open this Favorite.


Displays a list of the areas in the Opus Lister display which you may configure. Select the item then adjust the colors and text as required. Click on a specific area or item to see the settings for that item.


Select the desired color for this item.


Select the desired color for this item.


Select the desired color for this item.


Allows you to select the desired font from a displayed list.


Select the desired color for this item.


Use the colors as defined in your Windows System Display settings.


Turn on the display of these settings.


Displays a preview of what an Active Lister will look like with these settings.


Enter your input in this field.


Replace: Overwrites the current file with the new file.

Replace All: Overwrite the current and all selected files which match the criteria above.


Skip: Skips the current file and move on to the next selection if any.

Skip All: Skips the current and all files which match the criteria above.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes.


Resume: If the selected file exists in the remote directory and is smaller than the file being copied, attempts to resumes an aborted or partial transfer by starting from where you left off.

Resume All: If any of the selected files exist in the remote directory, match the above criteria and are smaller than the files being copied, attempts to resume all transfers.


Ignores any changes you have made since entering Customize and restores all objects to their original states.


Accepts the changes made and close the dialog.


Displays a list of the categories for the Opus command sets.


Displays the specific list of Opus commands in this Category.


Creates a new user command and displays the Command Editor ready to edit the command. A user command is a special custom object which can be made to perform one or more of the standard Opus commands or even run external applications. This means you can set up a series of actions in this one command under a given name then use this named command in any Toolbar buttons, file types or anywhere a standard Opus command is used.


Displays the Command Editor where you may edit the command functions for the selected item.


Deletes the selected custom user command.


Displays a list of available (defined) Toolbars. An item which is checked is active and is currently displayed in the system. It may either be free floating or attached to the Listers as defined in the adjacent section. Listers inherit all active non-floated Toolbars.


Create a new blank Toolbar.


Allows you to rename the selected Toolbar.


Deletes the selected Toolbar from the Opus system list. WARNING: This also physically deletes the Toolbar file. It cannot be recovered!


Allows you to import Opus Toolbars from locations other than the defined Buttons folder in the program installation directory or in your personal Applications folder.


Allows you to export the selected Opus Toolbar to an external location.


Save the current state of the Toolbar. That is, whether it is attached to a Lister or free floating.


Use a plain color instead of an image for the Toolbar background. The chosen color is shown in the adjacent item.


Choose the color to be used for the Toolbar background.


Use the defined image instead of a color for the Toolbar background. The image name is shown in the adjacent field.


Select the type of image or image pre-defined in Preferences - Images


Choose the image to be used for the Toolbar background.


Allows you to select whether to tile, stretch or share the image in the Toolbar. A shared image is displayed as if the image were mapped over the whole Lister display with the Toolbar showing a window into the image.


Selects how to display the optional icon images for the Opus buttons in the selected Toolbar, either always on, always off, or default to the setting as defined in the button itself.


Selects the size of the icon image for the Opus buttons in the Toolbar, either large, small, or default to the size as defined in the button itself.


Selects how to display the label text for the Opus buttons in the Toolbar, either always on, always off, or to default to the setting defined in the button itself.


Selects the color used to display the label text.


Selects the font to be used to display label text.


Choose the font from those available in the system.


Floats the selected Toolbar out of the Listers.


Display the Toolbar with a normal window title and border.


Adjust the buttons to be of equal size.


Sets the depth arrangement for the Toolbar. The pin changes the priority used for depth arranging the Toolbar with respect to other windows on the screen as follows:-

 Off - come to the top when active unless another window has a higher priority.

 Middle - come to the top when active and stay on top of all other Opus windows with lower priority.

 Top - Always stay on top of all other system windows which are not top-layer windows.

Warning: Pins can be very useful in some circumstance but by changing the default behavior of the window display you may lose other windows behind a top layer window.


When a Toolbar is docked with the top, bottom or side of the Desktop display, automatically hide it until you move the mouse over the area.


Adjust any button separators to be compatible with a vertical Toolbar.


Create a copy of the highlighted Toolbar.


Use the same background image for all sub-menus. This allows you to create more complete backgrounds for extended menu systems.


Define the color to be used for the label text.


Define the highlighting to be used for all buttons in this Toolbar. NOTE: A hierarchy applies - the global setting in Preferences overrides this setting which overrides this setting in the button itself.


Lock the position of the Toolbar in its current screen position.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Include a second folder tree for the right hand file display when a new Lister is opened.


Always include the folder tree on the left hand side of the Lister when a new Lister is opened.


Sets the default width of a new Lister in pixels.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Sets the default height of a new Lister in pixels.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Open the new Lister in maximized or full screen mode.


Select the co-ordinates of the top left hand point of where to open the new Lister.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Select the co-ordinates of the top left hand point of where to open the new Lister.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Open the new Lister relative to the current mouse position.


Choose the type of file display to be used.


Always include the viewer pane on the right hand side of the Lister when a new Lister is opened.


Always include a status bar on the bottom of the Lister display.


Manually choose the size and position to use when opening a new Lister.


Defines how files are selected when they match the criteria in the filter arguments.


When the filter is applied, hides items which do not match the criteria below. If items have been hidden, refresh the Lister (F5) to re-display the full unfiltered list of files.


Defines the filter equation. Enter the details for the selection from the available choices. You can have just one matching clause or multiple lines to further refine and tighten your selections. For details see the manual sections on Opus File Filter System, Pattern Matching Syntax and Regular Expression Syntax.


Swaps to simple filter selection mode.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes.


Performs the selection of files based on the criteria above but do not close the dialog.


Displays a list of the currently defined shortcut keys used in the current Opus configuration. This includes Opus Hot Keys and all shortcut keys used in the currently active Toolbars. The actual location of the key is also shown. Note: If a Toolbar is not active, any shortcut keys defined therein will not be displayed.


Creates a new Hokey.


Deletes the selected Hokey.


Allows you to edit the selected Hokey.


Shows the key or key combination used as the selected shortcut key. To change the key, activate this control and simply press the desired key or key combination. You may use any combination of qualifier keys (shift, Ctrl, Alt or Windows keys) PLUS any other single key including function keys, edit keys and numeric keypad keys.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Enter the text string to search for.


Searches file type extensions for the above text.


Searches file type descriptions for the above text.


Searches the file type content type for the above text.


Searches the program associated with a file type for a match with the above text.


Find the first file type which matches these criteria.


Find the next file type in sequence which matches these criteria if any.


Closes this dialog.


Selects a new icon image to be used for this file type.


Enter a description for this item in this field.


Shows the Windows file extensions matched by file type.


Adds a new extension to be matched by this file type.


Deletes the current extension matched by this file type.


Selects the MIME type corresponding to this file type (if any).


Creates a new item of the selected type.


Open the editor dialog for the selected item.


Deletes the selected item.


Sets the selected action as the default action for this file type. In Windows, this is performed when you double-click on the file. In Opus, it is performed when you double-click on a file unless you have specifically defined an Opus Double-Click event for this file type.


Choose an item from the list.


The defined action for this file type.


The type of action to perform.


Enter your input in this field.


Browse for an application to launch for this action.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Enter your input in this field.


Choose an item from the list.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Sets these attributes in the selected files.


Clears these attributes in the selected files.


Sets the creation time of the selected files to the following values.


Changes the setting to the current system time and date.


Sets the last modified time of the selected files to the following values.


Changes the setting to the current system time and date.


Apply the above changes to all files within the selected sub-folders.


Use the following filter or Advanced filter to selectively access files.


Enter a wildcard pattern or the name of the advanced filter file to use as the filter criteria. Possible wildcards are *,#, ?, |, (), [], ~ or single quote. See the manual for further details of the Pattern Matching Syntax.


Displays the Filter dialog to allow you to define a set of criteria for the filter.


Closes this dialog and applies any changes you have made to all the selected files.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes.


Set the Read Only attribute on the selected files.


Set the Archive attribute on the selected files.


Set the Hidden attribute on the selected files.


Set the System attribute on the selected files.


Clear the Read Only attribute on the selected files.


Clear the Archive attribute on the selected files.


Clear the Hidden attribute on the selected files.


Clear the System attribute on the selected files.


The name of the file to be split.


The folder in which to create the sub-files.


Browse for a folder.


Defines the maximum size for each sub-file. Select the size which fits your requirements or leave at automatic.


UUEncode the individual files after they have been created. This facilitates sending them via email or other ASCII transfer methods.


Displays the current file name or file name pattern to match. You may use a simple pattern which allows a single asterisk wildcard or full regular expression syntax. For example, to add the prefix "Old" to all your JPG files, enter a simple pattern "*.JPG" in the old name field and "Old*.JPG" in the new name field. Alternatively, you may use full regular expression syntax for the match (old name) field and the replace (new name) field. If in doubt on what patterns to use, test by viewing the output in the Preview Pane below with different patterns (or turn on Test mode) to see what would happen with different patterns before committing the action for real. Also remember that you can always reverse rename actions with the Opus Undo function.

For more details, see the manual on Regular Expression Syntax.


Displays the replacement file name, or the file name pattern if wildcard asterisk or regular expression syntax is used.  If in doubt on what patterns to use, test by entering different patterns and viewing the output in the Preview Pane below (or turn on Test mode when using large numbers of files) to see what would happen before committing the action for real. Also remember that you can always reverse rename actions with the Opus Undo function.

For more details, see the manual on Regular Expression Syntax.


Performs the rename function or test.


Skips this file and moves to the next selected file if any.


Abandons the rename sequence and closes the dialog.


Activates Opus Test Mode which displays the impending results of the rename action in the Opus Output Window but does not perform the actual rename. This allows you to test a pattern or regular expression syntax before committing the action.

NOTE: This function has largely been superseded by the Preview Pane below, but may be more useful if you have large numbers of files.


Displays the current file name or file name pattern to match. You may use a simple pattern which allows a single asterisk wildcard or full regular expression syntax. For example, to add the prefix "Old" to all your JPG files, enter a simple pattern "*.JPG" in the old name field and "Old*.JPG" in the new name field. Alternatively, you may use full regular expression syntax for the match (old name) field and the replace (new name) field. If in doubt on what patterns to use, test by entering different patterns and viewing the output in the Preview Pane below (or turn on Test mode when using large numbers of files) to see what would happen before committing the action for real. Also remember that you can always reverse rename actions with the Opus Undo function.


Choose an item from the list. Displays the replacement file name, or the file name pattern if wildcard asterisk or regular expression syntax is used.  If in doubt on what patterns to use, test by entering different patterns and viewing the output in the Preview Pane below (or turn on Test mode when using large numbers of files) to see what would happen before committing the action for real.  Also remember that you can always reverse rename actions with the Opus Undo function.


Select the type of Rename function to perform.


If the Rename action generates a file name which already exists, automatically modify the file name to "name (1)" etc.


This lets you have the file extension included in the find & replace operation - in earlier version of Opus this was listed as a separate Type.


Changes the Capitalization of the new files according to the following setting


Choose from the list the type of capitalization to apply to the file names.


The Sequential numbering option lets you automatically number or renumber the selected files. You can choose the starting number and the amount by which the number increments. Insert leading zeroes into the "from" field to control how many digits the numbers will use. By default the numbers are inserted at the end of the file name (in front of the extension), replacing any number that is already there. However, you can use the special [#] insert field to control where in the file name the number is placed.


Select the number from which to start the sequential numbering.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Select the increment to use for sequential numbering.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Allow recursive action to rename matching files in the selected sub-folders.


Displays a list of pre-defined Rename sequences. Select the item to show and import the saved settings. The Presets list contains a number of preset rename operations. The first three options in the list correspond to the different Rename Types available. The difference between choosing one of these from the Preset list and from the drop-down Type field is that clicking on a Preset automatically resets all other options in the Rename dialog to their default values. The Last Rename preset provides an easy way for you to redo the last rename operation you performed. The Number Files preset is created automatically by Opus and provides an example of using regular expressions and sequential numbering to renumber all selected files automatically. You can add your own presets to this list using the Add button.


Add the current settings as a new Preset under a selected name.


Delete the selected item from the Preset list.


Display a real-time preview of all selected files. You can use this to experiment with different wildcards or options and see exactly what changes will be made to the files you selected. Note that only the first 100 selected files are displayed in the preview so the Test mode is still available, as it may be useful for larger numbers of files.


Expands the dialog to display a real-time preview of all selected files. You can use this to experiment with different wildcards or options and see exactly what changes will be made to the files you selected. Note that only the first 100 selected files are displayed in the preview so the Test mode is still available, as it may be useful for larger numbers of files.


Swap to simple mode for the Rename dialog.


Enable case sensitivity for the above wildcard and find & replace renames case sensitive. This setting also applies to Regular Expression. When not enabled, case will be ignored.


Allows you to rename files using information from the files themselves. It is possible to use any of the Opus fields as input for the Rename routine - for example, file date, mp3 tag information, etc. This causes a new drop-down list button to appear next to the "new name" field. Use this drop-down list to insert the desired field codes. For example, you could rename MP3 files using their tags as follows: Old name: *.mp3 New name: {mp3album} - {mp3artist} - {mp3title}.mp3


Enter the name of the Folder.


Click this button to make your choice.


Closes this dialog and accepts any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and cancels this operation.


Check your desired options.


Reset this control to the program default values.


Let Opus choose the command automatically according to the type of remote server.


Enter the custom command to be used to obtain the remote directory from the ftp server. Usually this will be LIST or similar. The default is "LIST -alF" for normal ftp servers or "LIST -T" for Serv-U servers.


Select ASCII mode. This adjusts the End Of Line characters required between different Operating systems of Windows and Unix / Linux. Use this ONLY for text, html or script files etc. Using this for Binary or program files will corrupt the file.


Use Binary transfers if you wish to be sure that no changes will be made to the transferred files and no end of line stripping is done.


Let Opus choose the mode to use according to the list on the right.


Displays the list of file types to be modified between Windows and Unix systems which have different EOL characters.


Add a new file type.


Add a new file type.


Delete the highlighted file from the list above.


Some FTP servers support the MDTM command to set remote file date. While the current draft-ietf-ftpext-mlst-16 standard defines that this should be in UTC (GMT), this has been unclear in the past and different servers may require custom settings. From the popup list select to use UTC absolute file times or local file times. If you select local file times these can be modified according to the Time Zone setting in the FTP Site Preferences. If UTC is selected the file time is an absolute value not affected by Time Zone settings.


Let Opus choose the best mode to use according to type of file.


Let Opus choose the command automatically according to the type of remote server.


Enter the custom command to be used to obtain the remote directory from the ftp server. Usually this will be LIST or similar. The default is "LIST -alF" for normal ftp servers or "LIST -T" for Serv-U servers.


Takes the settings for this section from those defined in the Default Global Settings.


Select ASCII mode. This adjusts the EOL characters required between the different operating systems of Windows and Unix/Linux. Use this ONLY for text, html or script files etc. Using this for Binary or program files will corrupt the file.


Transfers files with no EOL changes. Use this when you wish to ensure that no EOL stripping is done and that files are transferred intact.


Let Opus choose the mode to use according to the type of file.


Some FTP servers support the MDTM command to set remote file date. While the current draft-ietf-ftpext-mlst-16 standard defines that this should be in UTC (GMT), this has been unclear in the past and different servers may require custom settings. From the popup list select to use UTC absolute file times or local file times. If you select local file times these can be modified according to the Time Zone setting in the FTP Site Preferences. If UTC is selected the file time is an absolute value not affected by Time Zone settings.


Define then system path where to start the Folder Tree display. Choose from the Desktop, My Computer, Drives or Current drive. For example. this allows you to start the folder tree display from your main drive.  If Current Drive is selected the tree dynamically rebuilds itself to only show the current drive being used.


Choose the format you wish to use to display the drive labels.


Automatically expand the selected branch in the tree.


When opening a second file display in dual display mode, also automatically open a second tree for the right hand display. When turned off, only one folder tree is displayed on the left. This rapidly tracks the file display with focus.


Enables the display of the Opus Favorites in the Folder Tree.


Enables the display of the Opus SmartFavorites in the Folder Tree to show your most popular folders.


Enables the display of the Recent List of recently used folders in the Folder Tree.


This option enables the automatic expansion of branches in the Folder Tree when you drag files or folders across a branch.


Allows auto-expanded branches to automatically collapse when the mouse position moves off the folder tree window.


Automatically expands the 'My Computer' section of the Folder Tree when first opened.


Normally this option is selected so that the single folder tree will rapidly track whichever file display is the active source. If you wish, you can turn this option off so that the Tree tracks only the left hand file display. An example of this may be where you wish to use a defined path for the right hand display as a popular destination but leave the tree tracking the left hand display only.


By default, the Folder Tree displays all folders as under Windows whether real or virtual. This option allows you to show only real folders in the tree. That is folders which correspond to a real folder on disk. This hides any virtual folders or additional third party system namespaces.


Normally, the Windows Tree does not show hidden folders (which have the H hidden attribute set). However the Opus Lister file display is designed to display all files and folders, according to the settings in Folder Options. This option allows you to see all hidden folders in the Folder Tree.


Enables the use of different colors for encrypted, compressed and system folders. The colors may be defined in Display - Color & Fonts section of Preferences.


Activates the internal Opus ZIP handling engine.


Make Opus the default ZIP handler for the system. If activated, this allows Opus to override any other ZIP handling system installed on this computer and open all ZIP files as virtual folders in Opus.


Add ZIP files to the Folder Tree and display them as virtual folders.


Adds items to the context menu to add the selected files to a ZIP file.


Adds this extra context menu.


Adds items to the context menu for ZIP files to extract the contents of the ZIP file using Opus.


Adds the Opus ZIP menu as a single popup menu rather than two separate items.


When this feature is enabled, Opus can extract the entire contents of a ZIP file whenever you double-click on certain types of files within the archive. This can be crucial, for example, with installation or setup programs which may require several ancillary files from the archive as well as the Setup program.


Enables the auto-extract functionality when you double-click on a ZIP file. If this option is disabled, the only way to access auto-extract is via the right-button context menu of a file. Auto-extract can be enabled on any double-click on a file or only when a specified qualifier is held down.


Select none, or the qualifier key to be used with a double-click to enable the auto-extract feature.


When enabled. Opus will ask on a double-click whether you wish to perform an auto-extract or not.


Lets you configure which file name patterns will trigger the auto-extract on double-click feature. This list is not needed if you only wish to access auto-extract via the right button context menu - in that case, any file can be auto-extracted. However, on a double-click, only files whose names match the patterns given here will be auto-extracted.


Check if the archive contains time zone information from the generating computer. If so, adjust file times to compensate for time zones.


Displays a dialog asking for extra information each time you copy files into a ZIP folder.


Tells Opus to automatically treat all ZIP files as read-only. This prevents you accidentally changing the contents of a ZIP file. In this mode, if you wish to make changes to the ZIP file you will need to enable writing to the file using the SET READONLY command.


Opus ZIP handling can store time zone information from the computer which created the ZIP file. This allows you to transfer files across time zones while preserving the absolute file dates and times. This setting adds time zone information to the Comment field of the ZIP file which may be visible in other ZIP systems as simple comments.


Drag the slider to select your preferred value


Select how to display the file size packed column in the virtual ZIP folder.


Allows Opus to add multiple files in batches rather than file by file. Faster but less error tolerant. See ZIP settings in the Opus manual for further details.


Allows Opus to delete multiple files in one batch rather than file by file. Faster but less error tolerant. See ZIP settings in the Opus manual for further details.


Enables the use of ZIP batch mode when extracting files from archives. Like the other batch modes, this can result in a dramatic increase in speed. However this mode is less tolerant of errors since it is not possible to identify individual files that have failed during the extract operation. See ZIP settings in the Opus manual for further details.


Use a temporary file when copying files to the ZIP archive instead of working with the ZIP file directly. This provides extra safety and security. In the event that some some operation may fail, the integrity of the original ZIP file will be preserved. Copying files to or from a ZIP file will be slower when using a temporary file.


Use a temporary file when handling ZIP files from removable media. This often means better performance because it requires less access to the often slower removable media.


By default, Opus identifies ZIP files by the .zip file extension. Other file types can also be recognized and handled as virtual ZIP folders by entering the file extension here.


Select the path to use for the working folder where zip files are extracted temporarily to access their contents.


When a Lister is closed, take its current settings and update and store the details to be used as the Default Lister settings.


Set the size for New Listers from the Default Lister (last Lister closed). Otherwise use the settings as defined for the Default New Lister settings (Default Settings).


Set the New Lister screen position from the Default Lister (last Lister closed). Otherwise use the settings as defined for the Default New Lister settings (Default Settings).


Use the same mode for New Listers as from the Default Lister (last Lister closed). Otherwise use the settings as defined for the Default New Lister settings (Default Settings).


Change to the folder paths as used in the Default Lister (last Lister closed). Otherwise use the settings as defined for the Default New Lister settings. (Default Folders).


Select to include a virtual folder path if set in the Default Lister settings. If not selected, a new Lister will not automatically return to virtual folders, such as Control Panel etc.


Selects the action for a double-click on the Windows Desktop. Opus must be running in the background for this action to be available. It is designed to allow you to quickly open a new Lister with a simple double-click on a clear area of the Desktop.


Open a new Lister when you double-click on the desktop according to the settings for Default New Lister and settings above.


Open a predefined Opus Layout consisting of one or more Lister displays. See Preferences - Layout - Saved Layouts.


Open a predefined Opus Layout consisting of one or more Lister displays. See Preferences - Layout - Saved Layouts.


Selects the action for a double-click on the Opus 'light bulb' icon in the system tray.


Open a new Lister when you on the Opus 'light bulb' icon in the system tray according to the settings for Default New Lister and settings above.


Open a predefined Opus Layout consisting of one or more Lister displays. See Preferences - Layout - Saved Layouts.


Open a predefined Opus Layout consisting of one or more Lister displays. See Preferences - Layout - Saved Layouts.


Opus will automatically reread the file and update the display in the viewer pane if the image changes.


When reviewing files to delete, it is often convenient to have Opus automatically select and display the next image in sequence if the current image is deleted (for example by pressing the Delete key).


Add an inner frame border around the displayed image.


Automatically apply a gamma correction by this amount to brighten or darken images shown in the viewer. This applies to all images displayed. You can adjust the gamma of each individual image when shown in the viewer from the menu or SHIFT + and SHIFT -.


Automatically apply a gamma correction by this amount to brighten or darken images shown in the viewer. This applies to all images displayed. You can adjust the gamma of each individual image when shown in the viewer from the menu or SHIFT + and SHIFT -.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Viewer plug-in can use scroll bars on the right and bottom edges of the viewer area permitting you to scroll around the displayed image. This option will hide the scroll bars.


Allows you to scroll around a large image displayed in the Viewer Pane by clicking and dragging the image with the left mouse button.


Show the control bar in the bottom of the Viewer Pane.


Select the background color to frame the image. Auto attempts to select a background color to match the image.


Select the background color to frame the image. Auto attempts to select a background color to match the image.


Open the extended Advanced mode dialog for this command.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes.


Opens the Advanced function editor.


Accepts these settings, closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes.


Enter the file name or file name pattern to match.


Select the text to search for inside the matched files.


Allow wildcards such as '*' in the Containing Text field to use patterns.


Only match the exact case of the text entered in the Containing Text field.


Optionally, select the type of files to match from the popup list.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Select the date selection to match or ignore.


Enter your input in this field.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Choose an item from the list.


Select the Time selection to match or ignore.


Enter your input in this field.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Choose an item from the list.


Select the file size selection to match or ignore.


Enter your input in this field.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Enter your input in this field.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes.


Apply any changes according to the settings above but do not close the dialog.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click this button to make your choice.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


When a directory is read, this option tells Opus to calculate and display the size of each sub-folder automatically. This is done by a background thread independent of the Lister itself so will not affect performance. With this option turned off, you may still select to calculate and display folder sizes at any time by an ALT-double-click on the folder or by using the GetSizes command.


Select the types of folders for which to automatically calculate and display the folder sizes. When a directory is read, this option tells Opus to calculate and display the size of each sub-folder automatically. This is done by a background thread independent of the Lister itself so will not affect performance. With this option turned off, you may still select to calculate and display folder sizes at any time by an ALT-double-click on the folder or by using the GetSizes command.


Automatically disables the extended Flat View mode when you change to a new folder.


This prevents Opus from querying the individual file for an icon. For most file types you will not see any difference since the icon is defined in the registry on a global file type basis and does not change from file to file.  However for some files such as programs (.EXEs) which contain their own icon, you should see that a generic icon is used in its place.

Highly Recommended for Network Drives: This option is designed not to replace all icons with the same image but to make it possible to disable the querying of files for their icons which can considerably slow down the display speed on networks and other slow devices.


Select the types of files for which to display a generic icons.  This prevents Opus from querying the individual file for a icon. For most file types you will not see any difference since the icon is defined in the registry on a global file type basis and does not change from file to file. However for some files such as programs (.EXEs) which contain their own icon, you should see that a generic icon is used in its place.

Highly Recommended for Network Drives: This option is designed not to replace all icons with the same image but to make it possible to disable the querying of files for their icons which can considerably slow down the display speed on networks and other slow devices.


When enabled, Opus will attempt to automatically detect the type of files in the folder and select the most appropriate view mode. For example, folders containing mainly images could be displayed in thumbnails mode. The actual selection criteria used by Opus can be refined in Folder Formats - Content Type in the next section. You may also define you own criteria to automatically select a view mode best suited to certain types of files.


If this is enabled, files and folders marked with both the H and S bits will not be shown in any Lister, either in the file display or the tree, anywhere, irrespective of the Folder Options in use. This means that this option overrides any Folder Options settings. For tighter control over specific folders, Folder Options provides filters to define what types of file and folders to display in the Lister.


Provides a mechanism to show you which folder you have recently been looking at and where you have recently been. If you enter a folder then use the navigational BACK button to return to the parent folder, this option provides a very useful highlight.


Define the number of seconds for which to highlight the last accessed folder after a BACK function.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


If files are stored in UPPER CASE format (as is done with some DOS based file names), this modifies the name according to the settings below.


If files are stored in UPPER CASE format, display the file name with the first letter in upper case and rest of the word in lower case.


If files are stored in UPPER CASE format, display the entire file name in lower case.


This option changes the way Opus displays dates in the Listers. If enabled, the date of a file is only displayed if it is older than seven days. Otherwise, Opus shows Today, Yesterday or name of the day if appropriate. (Example: Monday, Tuesday, etc.)


By default, the date/ time fields do not display the seconds value of the time. This displays seconds for all such fields.


This option causes folder shortcuts to be treated for the purpose of sorting as if they were real folders rather than files.


The file comment system that Opus 6 used (which was a proprietary format) has been replaced with support for the semi-standard descript.ion system. You can enable or disable support as required. Turning the file comment system on has the potential to affect performance, and so it is disabled by default.


Hides the display of the description files themselves if enabled.


Choose an item from the list.


Displays a list of the possible data fields which can be used in the Lister file Display columns. Select the item then select custom colors if required.


Choose the settings you wish to use for the Field selected in the list.


Select the foreground Text color for the selected item in the Field list.


Select the background Text color for the selected item in the Field list.


Select bold font style for the selected item in the Field list.


Select italic font style for the selected item in the Field list.


Select underline font style for the selected item in the Field list.


Allows you to configure the default sort direction for each Lister field.


Select the initial folder where to start the search.


Also searches files in sub-folders when looking for matching files. Otherwise, just the files in the selected folder will be searched.


Includes ZIP files when searching for matching files.


Clears the results of previous find commands before displaying any new results.


Select where to display the results of the search. Show the results in the window below, the Opus Output Window or in a separate Lister displaying the special 'Find Results' Collection. See the manual for further details on File Collections.


Defines the filter equation. Enter the details for the selection from the available choices. You can have just one matching clause or multiple lines to further refine and tighten your selections. For details see the manual sections on Opus File Filter System, Pattern Matching Syntax and Regular Expression Syntax.


Perform the find function according to the defined criteria.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes.


Activates the Opus File Logging system which records the file actions defined below.


Sets the maximum number of events to keep in the log.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Displays the file event log in the Opus Output Window.


Log the standard file events including copy, move and delete.


Log all file events as selected below.


Select your preferred option.


Select the options when a file or folder is copied or moved.


Only log the move event if the action was caused by a drag and drop.


Include all the files inside sub-folders in the Log when copying or moving folders.


Select the options when a file or folder is deleted.


Include all the files inside sub-folders in the Log when deleting folders.


Log Create Folder events.


Log Create Shortcut events.


Log when you rename a file or folder.


Include in the log all files renamed using wildcards.


Click this button to make your choice.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Enter the name of the folder or folders to be searched or select the drive or multiple drives from the buttons on the right.


Also searches files in sub-folders when looking for matching files. Otherwise, only the files in the selected folder will be searched.


Include ZIP files in the selected folders when searching for matching files.


Clear the results of previous find commands before displaying the results of the search.


Select where to display the results of the search. Show the results in the window below, the Opus Output Window or in a separate Lister displaying the special 'Find Results' Collection. See the manual for further details on File Collections.


Show results in the destination file display Lister.


Start the Search.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Opus can start automatically when you boot the computer. This makes Opus immediately ready when you need it. The program can be set to open quietly, for example, to just add the Opus light bulb icon to the tray menu, or can be set to open the last set of Listers you used or even complete Layouts. This is the recommended way to start Opus and will ensure that the program is always available for immediate use.


An introductory window or "splash screen" can be shown whenever Opus is started. This provides quick access to the main Opus functions to Open a New Lister, access Preferences or Customize while you are learning the program.


Directory Opus will not open any Listers at all. The only indication that Opus is running will be the icon in the system icon tray (and even that may not be visible if you have disabled it!)


When Opus starts, a single Lister will be opened. Its size, position, state and the folder it displays may be configured from the settings in the Layout section in Preferences.


When Opus shuts down, any Listers that are opened are automatically remembered. If you have this option enabled, they are automatically re-opened again when Opus runs the next time. If you have the Include virtual folders option turned off, any Listers that were displaying system namespaces or virtual folders such as Control Panel, Fonts etc will not be re-opened automatically.


Include or exclude virtual folders such as Control Panel etc from automatically reopening from the above setting.


Opus will load a saved Lister layout automatically when it runs. You can select the layout you wish to load from the drop-down list.


Select the predefined Opus Layout to open.


The Opus Output Window displays the results of various functions and activities within Opus. It may be moved and positioned anywhere on the Desktop area. If you drag the Output Window to the edge of the Desktop area it can be made to automatically dock with the edge of the display by enabling this option.

As with other Opus controls, if you hold down the Shift key while dragging the window, Opus will exhibit the reverse of the defined action.


Change the mode to use global configuration settings or user-specific next time Opus runs. A dialog box will be displayed next time you run Opus, allowing you to choose between global and private settings.


This option lets you turn on or off the automatic background check for new versions of Directory Opus. By default Opus will perform this check once per month by connecting to the GP Software web site. This will only take place if you have an active Internet connection - you will not be prompted or otherwise disturbed. You can configure auto-update checking to take place monthly or weekly, or disable it altogether. You can also configure the proxy settings if your connection to the Internet is through a proxy.


Select the schedule to check for newer versions of Opus.


Check for updates immediately.


Perform the check for updates silently and do not display any dialog boxes unless an update is available.


Use the following HTTP proxy to connect to the internet.


Enter the details of your Proxy Server.


Enter the port of the proxy server. This may be 8080 or as defined by your system administrator.


Windows XP theme (visual styles) support can be enabled. If you do not want Opus to use Windows XP themes it is better to turn it off here rather than using the Windows XP Compatibility settings, since this option will not prevent programs launched from Opus launch from using themes.


This provides a shortcut when entering text into a path field. To save typing the complete string of characters, Opus can complete the path for you. You may disable path completion or select between having Opus complete the path automatically as you type or wait until up/down cursor keys are pressed before completing the path. Path completion is available in any field that is designed for path entry, for example, the default Path Toolbar or the hidden path entry field that appears when you press Shift-Enter in a Lister.

After Opus completes a path, typing a forward slash or back slash character will jump to the end of the path string ready for you to continue typing the next element.


Choose the method to use for Path completion.


Attempt path completion for local drives. Useful for some slow or network connections to prevent excessive delays in querying the remote server for names.


This is a tri-state button. It ptovides an option to totally disable the custom title bar rendering in Opus. This is to allow programs such as WindowBlinds to skin Opus properly. Note that this mode totally disables all Opus custom title bar functionality, including the pin and zoom buttons in Listers, and the pin buttons on other Opus windows.

The middle state of the WindowBlinds option is indeed "auto" in that it tries to detect whether WindowBlinds is running and turns on automatically if it is, staying off it if isn't.


Check your desired options.


User name to use for authentication on the server. Use the same settings as for your normal web browser.


Password to use for authentication on the server. Use the same settings as for your normal web browser.


Enables Windows Quick View support for this file type. This adds Quick View to the Windows context menu for all files of this type. Not available under Windows 2000.


If a file of this type is run from a remote FTP site, asks you before opening a file of this type.


Normally the file display colors will come from the Preferences - Display settings. These options allow you to override these and define specific colors for the selected and unselected states for files of this type.


The new Folder Formats section of Preferences - Folders (replaces the "Advanced" mode on the old Folder Options dialog.  This shows a standard list but with the ability to have groups of items that can be collapsed or expanded.  The groups of formats displayed in this list are:

• Folder Formats - formats that have been saved for specific folders;

• Content Type Formats - formats that have been defined for File Type Groups;

• Default Formats - the formats that are used if no other defined format overrides them;

• Favorite Formats - formats you create that can be accessed quickly from other parts of Opus.

The behavior of the Folder Formats list is defined from the options provided. If an entry is not checked it means it is not currently defined. Right-clicking on formats in the list lets you copy and paste from one format to another. You can also reset individual formats to the defaults or one of your Favorite formats, and add an existing format to your Favorites in this manner.


Displays the Folder Format Editor dialog where you can add new Folder Options in the selected section.


Display the Format Editor dialog where you can edit the settings for the selected folder format.


Delete the selected item from the list.


Click this button to make your choice.


Shows the details of the Info Tip as defined for this type of file.


Clear all details of this Info Tip.


Do not show the popup InfoTip for this type file.


Files stored on a CD-ROM have the Read-only attribute set by definition since one cannot write to the medium. This attribute is normally preserved by Opus when you copy the file. On a normal hard drive this can be annoying. Set this option to automatically clear the read-only attribute when a file is copied from a CD.


Clears the archive ('A') attribute on the copied files after they have been copied.


Clears the archive ('A') attribute on original (source) files after they have been successfully copied


Sets the Read-only, Archive, Hidden and System attributes of the copied file to match those of the source file.


Also copy and update any description files for the copied files.


Sets the time and date stamps of the copied file to match those of the source file.


This option provides a safety feature which asks you to confirm the action before overwriting one file with another of the same name.


The Read-only attribute is often used to safeguard important files which you do not wish to accidentally overwrite. This option provides a safety feature which asks you to confirm the action before overwriting a file whose Read-only attribute is set.


Define the behavior when copying files in Flat View mode to define if or how to preserve the extended folder structure.


Automatically copy any properties set for files through the system Properties dialog (e.g. Description, Keywords, etc.)


When copying files, update and adjust the file security and other settings of the source file to match the destination folder settings.


This option activates the exclusive Opus File Filter when copying files from the current and any selected folders. It allows you to recursively copy only those files in the selected folders which match a given set of criteria. For example, you may wish to copy only files which have changed after a certain date, or which are of a specific type.


Set the internal buffer size for Opus to use when copying files. Usually the default of 64K is sufficient but on some system you may need to adjust this if you receive errors while copying. For example, Microsoft's VirtualPC system sometimes requires this to be dropped to 8K.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Before the copy operation starts, Opus can recursively count all the files in the selected folders. This allows the progress bar for the copy function to display more accurately the percentage complete of the operation. If turned off, Opus will count only the files and folders selected in the top-level folder.


While a file copy is in progress, Opus can display a simple progress display or an extended one showing the byte count, transfer speeds and other information. Select from the list those locations where you wish to show the extended display.


Always show progress speed bar for all locations.


Only show progress speed bar with extended details for the following locations.


Always show progress speed bar with extended details for local drives.


Always show progress speed bar with extended details for networked drives and floppy disk drives.


Always show progress speed bar with extended details when copying to or from FTP sites.


Always show progress speed bar with extended details when copying to or from ZIP archives.


Select the folder path of the source for comparisons.


Select the folder path of the destination for comparisons.


Perform a comparison between the source and destination folders according to the settings.


Synchronize the Source and Destination folders according to the settings.


One way copy:  Synchronizes the destination folder with the source folder. Any "non-matching" files will be copied from the source to the destination. You can choose the type of comparison that is done on these files from Size (copies if size is different), Timestamp (copies if timestamp is different); Timestamp and size (copies if either size or timestamp are different) or Byte comparison (compares the actual files to determine if they have changed. This mode implies "size" - Opus will only compare files if the sizes are the same)

Two way copy: Synchronizes in both directions - the source with the destination, and vice versa. Files are only copied in this mode, not deleted. The comparison method can not be set as the only method that makes sense in this mode is timestamp comparison. If a file that exists on one side does not exist on the other, it will be copied. If the file exists on both sides, the newer file is copied over the older one.


Once the comparison has been performed, any files that have not been marked to be either copied or deleted will be hidden from the display.


Define the method of comparison.


Delete files from the destination folder that do not exist in the source folder.


If enabled, file timestamps are only compared to a 1 minute resolution. This is useful when comparing different file systems that may store seconds differently or not at all. If this option is disabled, timestamps are compared with a 2 second resolution.


If enabled, the contents of all sub-folders are synchronized as well. If this option is chosen, Flat View is used to display the contents of all sub-folders that will be affected by the synchronize operation.


Lets you specify a file filter or wildcard pattern for the synchronize operation. Only files that match the specified filter will be compared.


Select the pre-defined filter to use.


Display the Filter dialog to let you define a filter equation.


If this option is enabled then Opus will only compare files that already existing in both locations. This lets you update a set of files that already exist with new versions.


Automatically shrink the Synchronize panel when performing the comparison or synchronize operation. This gives more room to see the actual folders and files. You can restore the panel from the small buttons on the top row of the panel.


Shows a list of images pre-defined for use as backgrounds in various Opus objects. The Standard Image definitions are provided for easy reference as placeholders elsewhere in the Opus system. Alternatively you may add your own.


Adds a new image to the pre-defined list.


Removes the selected image from the list or clears a pre-defined Opus image definition.


Browse for an image to be used for the selected Opus Standard Image.


Uses the selected color for this definition instead of an image.


Selects the color to be used as a background in place of the selected image.


Shared is a special Opus mode where a single image is drawn as the background over the whole Lister Window and any objects using it. If this image is set to be drawn as a Shared Images in the object, Opus will tile or stretch the image to fit the available area as required.


Select one of the pre-defined images to use as the background in the file displays.


Defines whether to tile or stretch the image if it is smaller than the available area, or share it over multiple objects in the Lister display. The background images can be tiled, stretched or shared. Shared is a special Opus mode where a single image is drawn as the background over the whole Lister Window and any objects using it.


Select one of the pre-defined images to use as the background in the folder tree.


Defines whether to tile or stretch the image if it is smaller than the available area, or share it over multiple objects in the Lister display. The background images can be tiled, stretched or shared. Shared is a special Opus mode where a single image is drawn as the background over the whole Lister Window and any objects using it.


Select one of the pre-defined images to use as the background in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Lister.


Defines whether to tile or stretch the image if it is smaller than the available area, or share it over multiple objects in the Lister display. The background images can be tiled, stretched or shared. Shared is a special Opus mode where a single image is drawn as the background over the whole Lister Window and any objects using it.


Select one of the pre-defined images to be used as the background for the Viewer Pane.


Defines whether to tile or stretch the image if it is smaller than the available area, or share it over multiple objects in the Lister display. The background images can be tiled, stretched or shared. Shared is a special Opus mode where a single image is drawn as the background over the whole Lister Window and any objects using it.


Select one of the pre-defined images to be used as the background for the Contacts List pane.


Defines whether to tile or stretch the image if it is smaller than the available area, or share it over multiple objects in the Lister display. The background images can be tiled, stretched or shared. Shared is a special Opus mode where a single image is drawn as the background over the whole Lister Window and any objects using it.


Select one of the pre-defined images to be used as the background for the Folder Tabs display.


Defines whether to tile or stretch the image if it is smaller than the available area, or share it over multiple objects in the Lister display. The background images can be tiled, stretched or shared. Shared is a special Opus mode where a single image is drawn as the background over the whole Lister Window and any objects using it.


Select the folder or path in which to search for duplicate files. Use the browse buttons to select the folder or drives you want to search, or turn on the padlock button to track the current folder in the Lister.


Start the search for duplicate files according to the criteria you have set.


Enter the details of the duplicate files or leave blank to find all duplicates. This tool allows you to search a single folder, drive or multiple drives for duplicate files. You can search for duplicates of a specific file only, or ALL duplicate files


Delete the duplicate files.


Select where to display the results of the search. By default this function will show the results in the "Duplicate Files" File Collection but you may choose to display the results elsewhere.


Include sub-folders. Otherwise perform the comparisons only on files in the current folder.


Include ZIP files in the selected folders when searching for matching files.


Clear the results of previous comparisons before displaying the results of the search.


The Delete mode option can be used to easily delete duplicate files once you have found them. If turned on, the results Lister will automatically be put into checkbox mode, and all duplicate files (except for the first one found for each set) will be marked for deletion. You can then click the Delete Toolbar button to delete them without having to select them one by one.


Filename and size will identify files as being duplicates if they have the same file name and are the same size.


MD5 checksum will calculate the checksums of files for a more secure comparison. This method is much slower than the previous method, but it does let you identify duplicate files that may not have the same file name.


Use a file filter to further refine your comparisons to files of specific types. This is often useful to synchronize folders which contain extraneous files such as .EXE or .DLL files, for example within a Visual Studio programming environment.


Select the pre-defined filter to use.


Display the Filter dialog to let you define a filter equation.


Specifies your email address that others should use to send mail to you. This will appear in the From: and ReplyTo: fields of the email message.


Specifies your name which will appear in the From: field of the email message.


Specifies the mail server for outgoing email messages. This will normally be the same as you have set for your normal email program. Consult your system administrator if you have difficulties.


Specify the port for the SMTP server. Usually port 25.


Your server requires user name and password authentication. Use the same settings as for your normal email program.


User name to use for authentication on the server. Use the same settings as for your normal email program.


Password to use for authentication on the server. Use the same settings as for your normal email program.


Open the Opus Output Window when sending email via this system.


Directory Opus has a built-in SMTP mailer which lets you send files via email directly to an SMTP server rather than going through an external email client with MAPI.  Your SMTP server settings must be configured here before the mailer can be used.  Note that the Output Window has an Email tab which displays the status of outgoing messages. From here you may cancel queued messages and even create new messages using the built-in email window.


Select the maximum number of simultaneous email connections to allow.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Select the email address of the recipient.


Select the email address to send a copy of the message.


Enter the subject of the email.


Choose an item from the list.


Send the email.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Convert the image to this format.


Select the format for the converted image.


Select the Quality level to use for JPEG conversion.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Rotate the image as selected.


Choose the rotational angle of 90, 180 or 270 degrees.


Resize the image in the selected manner.


Select the size of the image to produce.


For a custom resize, select the horizontal size for the image in pixels.


For a custom resize, select the vertical size for the image in pixels.


When writing the new file, add a suffix to the file name corresponding to the selected size.


Perform the resize within the selected criteria but preserve the aspect ratio. This means the image may be smaller then you have selected in one dimension so as to preserve the aspect ration of the original image.


Instead of writing the converted images to the source folder, save them in the destination folder. This is mainly used for a dual file display Lister.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Perform the conversions on all images selected in the file display


Skip this image and do not perform any conversion or changes.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Normally when you create a shortcut to an item, the name of the shortcut is automatically changed if there is already a shortcut by that name in the target folder. For example, 'Shortcut to file' may be changed to 'Shortcut (2) to file' automatically. If you turn this option off Opus will not automatically rename new shortcuts, but instead will prompt you to enter a new name or replace the existing one if a shortcut already exists by that name.


Windows uses a file extension of .lnk for shortcuts to files. By default Opus displays all file extensions. This option hides these file extensions for shortcuts.


When displaying an icon for a shortcut, Opus can optionally overlay a small image of an arrow to distinguish between shortcuts and normal files or folders.


Opus creates the new name for a shortcut as "Shortcut to <name of file>". This setting allows you to choose the argument to be used to create the new name. By default, Opus uses <Shortcut to %1>. The %1 is replaced with the name of file to which the shortcut is being created.


Opus creates the new name for a shortcut as "Shortcut to <name of file>". This setting allows you to choose the argument to be used to create the new name. By default, Opus uses <Shortcut to %1>. The %1 is replaced with the name of the file to which the shortcut is being created.


Choose the argument to be used to create the new name for a shortcut if that name already exists. By default, this is <Shortcut (%2) to %1>  The argument %2 is replaced with the number of the shortcut.


Choose the argument to be used to create the new name for a shortcut if that name already exists. By default, this is <Shortcut (%2) to %1>  The %1 argument is replaced with the name of the file to which the shortcut is being created. The %2 argument is replaced with the number of the shortcut.


Displays a list of programs which may be useful in opening a file of this type. This list will appear in the context menu under the Open with label.


Set the selected item as the default program to open a file of this type. This will become the default Open action performed when you double-click on a file of this type or highlighting the file and press Enter.


Remove the selected program from the Open With list.


Displays a list of the programs available to open a file of this type.


Add the selected program to the Open With list.


Browse for a program with which to open this type of file.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Close the dialog and abandon any selections.


Import any Opus File Types defined in the exported settings.


Remove any existing Opus file types before importing any new ones.


Import any Opus File Filters defined in the exported settings.


Overwrite any existing File FIlters of the same name with those from the exported settings.


Import the image files defined in the exported settings.


Overwrite any existing image files of the same file name with those from the exported settings.


Import any Menus and Toolbars defined in the exported settings.


Overwrite any existing Toolbars of the same file name with those from the exported settings.


Import the following Preference settings from the exported settings.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Import the Sound Preferences from the exported settings.


Overwrite the existing sound files of the same file name with those from the exported settings.


Click this button to make your choice.


Include in the exported settings any File Types currently defined in Opus.


Include in the exported settings any File Filters currently defined in Opus.


Include in the exported settings any image files currently defined in Opus.


Include in the exported settings any Toolbar files currently defined in Opus.


Instead of just exporting the Toolbars currently in use, include all the Toolbar files in the Buttons folder of your local settings.


Include in the exported settings the current Preferences and configuration settings.


As a security measure, remove any defined passwords for FTP sites defined in the FTP Address book.


Include in the exported settings any sound files currently defined in Opus.


For security, you may protect the exported Preferences file with a password of your choice.  Be sure to remember this since there is no way to recover the exported files if you have forgotten the password!


Enter your desired password. Be sure to remember this since there is no way to recover the exported files if you have forgotten the password!


Save a description in the exported settings to remind you or explain to others the details of the exported Preferences.


Enter text to describe the exported Preferences set.


Click this button to make your choice.


This enables alpha-blending of the background color for selected files and folders. The effect is designed for users who have faster machines - you may want to leave this turned off if you have a slow machine, especially under Windows 9x.


Select the % of alpha-blending of the background color for selected files and folders. The higher the value the stronger the effect will be. Suggested value is 50%.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


This enables alpha-blending of the selection rectangle when highlighting files by a drag-select. The effect is designed for users who have faster machines - you may want to leave this turned off if you have a slow machine, especially under Windows 9x.


Select the % of alpha-blending of the file selection rectangle. The higher the value the stronger the effect will be. The suggested value is 10%.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


This enables alpha-blending of the row and column background colors. The effect is designed for users who have faster machines - you may want to leave this turned off if you have a slow machine, especially under Windows 9x.


This enables alpha-blending of the selected items with the column background colors. The effect is designed for users who have faster machines - you may want to leave this turned off if you have a slow machine, especially under Windows 9x.


Opus fully controls the display of files when showing the contents of normal folders with a physical location. However for Windows virtual folders, Opus usually provides only the 'container' and Windows controls all other aspects of the display including files, display columns and the background images. This option allows Opus to override Windows settings and supply the background images in such cases. Examples of virtual folders are the Desktop, Control Panel, FONTS, etc.


This option tells Opus to let Windows handle the display of Virtual folders (such as the Windows Fonts directory) which do actually have a physical location. The commands available in the Virtual folder will be supplied by the operating system, not by Opus. Note that the Desktop (which is both a virtual and a real folder) is excluded from this option, and always appears as a virtual folder.


This option tells Opus to treat Virtual folders (such as the Windows Fonts directory) which do actually have a physical location as real folders and enable the full Opus command set. Otherwise, the commands available in the Virtual folder will be supplied by the operating system, not by Opus. Note that the Desktop (which is both a virtual and a real folder) is excluded from this option, and always appears as a virtual folder. This option is particularly useful with the Windows Fonts directory, as viewing it as a "real" folder enables the use of Opus Thumbnails mode.


Defined the specific Virtual Folders you wish to treat as real folders and to be displayed specifically by Opus and not by Windows.


Displays a list of the specific Virtual Folders you wish to treat as real folders.


Add a new item to the list of defined Virtual Folders.


Remove the highlighted entry from the list.


Displays a list of the defined Aliases. Opus implements a folder path alias system whereby you can use "shortcuts" to refer to standard system paths. You can define your own aliases which can refer to any folder or path, including FTP and Zip files.  The path completion system has been enhanced to support folder aliases - if enabled, you can simply type a / character in a path or location field and then use the cursor up and down keys to scroll through a list of your defined folder aliases, as well as the built-in system aliases.


Opus implements a folder path alias system whereby you can use "shortcuts" to refer to standard system paths. You can define your own aliases which can refer to any folder or path, including FTP and Zip files.  The path completion system has been enhanced to support folder aliases - if enabled, you can simply type a / character in a path or location field and then use the cursor up and down keys to scroll through a list of your defined folder aliases, as well as the built-in system aliases.

Click this button to add a new Alias to a defined path to a folder.


Remove the highlighted entry from the defined alias list.


Rename the highlighted entry.


Browse for a new path to be defined as an Alias for the selected item.


The Viewer Plugin Manager lets you configure your installed Viewer (or VFSPlugins) Plug-ins. From here you can selectively enable or disable plug-ins, configure them and view information about them, and change the order in which they are called. For example, if you have two different plug-ins that can both handle a given type of file, you can rearrange the plug-in order so that the one you want to use for that file type is called first.


Display the details of the selected plugin.


Opens the plug-in supplied dialog allowing you to configure certain settings for the performance of the selected plug-in, if available.


Moves the selected plug-in up the priority list. If you have two different plug-ins that can both handle a given type of file, you can arrange the plug-in order so that the one you want to use for that type of file is called first.


Moves the selected plug-in down the priority list. If you have two different plug-ins that can both handle a given type of file, you can arrange the plug-in order so that the one you want to use for that type of file is called first.


Refresh the plug-in list. This will reread the Viewers (or the VFSViewers) folder and update the enabled plug-ins if you have added new plug-ins since starting Opus.


Lister Styles are similar to layouts except they affect an existing Lister rather than opening new ones. The tab at the end is called "Previous". This will be the "default" style when you open a Lister initially and it can optionally remember the previous style if you change styles by clicking on another tab. Right-clicking on the tab control provides options in the context menu to update the current Styles or access the Preferences section directly.

When defining Styles you can choose which settings in the Lister a style affects. So for example it is possible to have a style that only controls the tree or file display layout while leaving all other parameters the same. Different styles can be configured to include paths and view modes for individual file displays rather than only for both, and you can choose Flat View for the left/right file display. Lister Styles can have user-defined descriptions that are shown as tool tips when hovering over the Styles tab.

The default styles that are created by Opus can be removed or edited as you wish. Note that one of them, Filmstrip, replaces the old Lister Filmstrip mode.


Create a new Style and add it to the list.


Create a new Style based on the highlighted entry.


Rename the highlighted entry.


Add or edit the description for the highlighted Style.


Delete the highlighted entry.


Always change the display to this type of File Display when opening this Style. If this item is turned off, the Style will not change the currently displayed state in the current Lister when changing to this Style.


Select the state you wish to use for this item.


Always include a Utility Panel pane in the Style. If this is not selected, the Style will not change the currently displayed state of the Utility Panel in the current Lister when changing to this Style.


Select the state you wish to use for this item.


Always include a Folder Tree in the Style. If this is not selected, the Style will not change the currently displayed state of the Folder Tree in the current Lister in the current Lister when changing to this Style.


Select the state you wish to use for this item.


Always include a Contacts List pane in the Style. If this is not selected, the Style will not change the currently displayed state of the Contacts List pane in the current Lister when changing to this Style.


Select the state you wish to use for this item.


Always include a Viewer Pane in the Style. If this is not selected, the Style will not change the currently displayed state of the Viewer Pane in the current Lister when changing to this Style.


Select the state you wish to use for this item.


Always include a Status Bar at the bottom of the Lister in the Style. If this is not selected, the Style will not change the currently displayed state of the Status Bar in the current Lister when changing to this Style.


Select the state you wish to use for this item.


Always change the view mode to Flat View when opening this Style. If this item is turned off, the Style will not change the currently displayed state in the current Lister when changing to this Style.


Choose the type of Flat View display to use from:-

• Mixed displays all files and folders underneath the current folder in one big list - as if they were all in the current folder. This mode is extremely useful for identifying similar (or duplicate) files and groups of the same types of file in multiple folders, quickly identify the largest or smallest files in the folder tree, and so on;

• Mixed (No Folders) is similar to Mixed but hides all sub-folders, showing only the files;

• Grouped is similar to a Folder Tree containing files. In this mode, the files in the list are grouped together by location, and the display is indented to represent the directory structure.


Always change to this View Mode when opening this Style. If this item is turned off, the Style will not change the currently displayed state in the current Lister when changing to this Style.


Specify the View Mode to use for this Style display. Valid view modes are large icons, small icons, list, details, power and thumbnails.  Auto selects the View Mode based on the content.


Always change to and display this folder path in the file display when opening this Style. If this item is turned off, the Style will not change the currently displayed state in the current Lister when changing to this Style.


Define the folder path to be opened whenever this Style is called.


Always use this defined folder format when opening this Style. If this item is turned off, the Style will not change the currently displayed state in the current Lister when changing to this Style.


Edit the folder format to be used to display this Style.


Always change the view mode to Filmstrip with source file display showing Thumbnails View mode and a Viewer Pane when opening this Style. If this item is turned off, the Style will not change the currently displayed state in the current Lister when changing to this Style.


Display and/or edit the Folder Tabs which will be displayed along with this Folder Style.


When enabled, adjusts the size of the display window to that of the image according to the following settings. Otherwise, the viewer remembers its last size and position when you next open it irrespective of the image size.


Adjusts the size of the display window to that of the image according to these settings.


Adjusts the position of the viewer to be centered on the screen.


Activates the mouse wheel to cycle through multiple images in a folder.


Display a frame around the image.


Automatically apply a gamma correction by this amount to brighten or darken images shown in the viewer. This applies to all images displays. You can adjust the gamma of each individual image when shown in the viewer from the menu or SHIFT + and SHIFT -.


Select the amount of gamma adjustment to apply to the image.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


This option enables the automatic loading of all pictures in the current folder. When you double-click on a picture, Opus will create a list of all the current pictures in the current folder and make them available in the Viewer via the Back and Next buttons.


Disable the display of scroll bars if the image is larger than the viewable area.


Use the same Viewer window for all displays. Otherwise, Open a new Viewer window each time you select to view an image.


Leave the zoom level set between images to that currently being used or adjust according to these settings.


Leave the zoom level set between images to that currently being used or adjust according to these settings.


Normally, the viewer will show each image from the selected files in turn and stop when it reaches the end of the list. This option tells the viewer not to stop at the end if the list but but to wrap around and continue.


Set the background color for the Viewer window outside the displayed image.


Set the background color for the Viewer window outside the displayed image. Auto selects a color from the image to match the background to that of the image.


Choose the action for the left mouse button from the selections.


Choose the action for the middle mouse button from the selections.


Define how often Opus will check for updates.


Perform the update in the background and not display the Check for Updates dialog.


Define the HTTP proxy server if required. This will normally be the same as you use for your web browser. Consult your ISP or System Administrator if uncertain of the correct settings.


Enter the name or IP of the server.


Enter the port to use for the proxy server. Often this is 8080.


User name to use for authentication on the server. Use the same settings as for your normal web browser.


Password to use for authentication on the server. Use the same settings as for your normal web browser.


This option enables automatic docking of individual single file display Listers. When you drag the title bar of a single file display Lister over the title bar of another, Opus will automatically join or 'dock' the two Listers to form a single Lister with a dual file display.  You may separate a dual file display by dragging the title bar of one file display out of the window, and you may also swap left and right hand side displays by dragging the title bar of one display horizontally to the opposite side. Alternatively, when not enabled, Listers will not dock and dual file displays cannot be swapped or separated.


Normally, a double-click on the title bar of the Lister window minimizes the window to the Task bar. This special mode enables the Lister to be zoomed to just a title bar on the double-click.


Enables depth pins in the Lister title bar. The pin changes the priority used to depth arrange the window to which it is attached as follows:-

 Off - come to the top when active unless another window has a higher priority.

 Middle - come to the top when active and stay on top of all other Opus windows with lower priority.

 Top - Always stay on top of all other system windows which are not top-layer windows.

Warning: Pins can be very useful in some cases but by changing the default behavior of the window display you may lose other windows behind a top layer window.


Enables the special Opus Zoom button [image] in the Lister window title bar. By default, the Zoom button provides two different sizes for the Lister window and allows you to swap between them.


Show small footprints in the Windows task bar with brief details of each Opus Lister that is currently open.


Allows you to not show the footprints when a Lister is minimized to reduce distractions in the Task for non displayed windows.


Activates a special mode for the Opus Zoom button [image] in the Lister window title bar. By default, the Zoom button provides two different sizes for the Lister window and allows you to swap between them. This option changes the behavior of the Zoom button. Instead of swapping between the two sizes it reduces the Lister to a small footprint showing only the title bar.  Holding down the SHIFT key when selecting the Zoom button inverts the defined behavior.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Enables the display of the full file path in the Lister window title bar. When turned off, only the folder name will be displayed.


By default, the TAB key progressively selects different elements in the Lister File Display window. This option allows you to restrict this and exclusively use the TAB key to switch between the source and destination file displays in a dual display Lister.


When multiple files are selected, the viewer will show each file in turn automatically with the delay as set below.


Displays images in the slide show in random order.


Defines the delay between individual images in the slide show.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Enter the name you wish to give to the Theme.


Enter a description for this Theme to briefly explain what it contains or the type of Theme..


Enter details of the author of this Theme.


Include your chosen colors in the Theme.


Include your fonts settings from Preferences - Display in the Theme.


Include your chosen images in the Theme.


Include your chosen sounds in the Theme.


Save this theme.


Clear all the settings.


Displays thumbnail images of the available Opus Themes.


Import an externally supplied Opus Theme into the local Opus system.


Click this button to make your choice.


Import these settings from the selected Theme. If unchecked, these settings will not be imported and your current settings will not be changed.


Import these settings from the selected Theme. If unchecked, these settings will not be imported and your current settings will not be changed.


Import these settings from the selected Theme. If unchecked, these settings will not be imported and your current settings will not be changed.


Import these settings from the selected Theme. If unchecked, these settings will not be imported and your current settings will not be changed.


Load the selected Theme and adjust the Opus display to that defined by the Theme.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes.


Do not replace Windows Explorer. Do not use Opus as an Explorer Replacement but only as an independent File Manager.

For best performance we recommend the second option below. This allows you to take advantage of all the Opus performance features but still retain access to the special features of the Microsoft Operating systems such as Windows XP for special places such as the Control Panel etc.

Note that these options ONLY apply when you access one of these folders or special places outside of Opus - that is, when you access a folder such as the Control Panel from the Start Menu or a Desktop shortcut etc. If you access these folders from within Opus, these settings do not apply and the folder will open in an Opus Lister as normal. Exactly how such folders are displayed in Opus may depend on the settings in Folders - Virtual Folders.


Recommended. This option allows you to take advantage of all the Opus performance features but still retain access to the special features of the Microsoft Operating systems such as Windows XP for special places such as the Control Panel.

Note that these options ONLY apply when you access one of these folders or special places outside of Opus - that is, when you access a folder such as the Control Panel from the Start Menu or a Desktop shortcut etc. If you access these folders from within Opus, these settings do not apply and the folder will open in an Opus Lister as normal. Exactly how such folders are displayed in Opus may depend on the settings in Folders - Virtual Folders.


Make Opus the default handler for all folders except those special places in the list below. If you select this option, normally this list below would include Control Panel and such special places but any folder can be added to the excluded list below and these will then be opened in Windows Explorer not in Opus.

For best performance we recommend the second option above.

Note that these options ONLY apply when you access one of these folders or special places outside of Opus - that is, when you access a folder such as the Control Panel from the Start Menu or a Desktop shortcut etc. If you access these folders from within Opus, these settings do not apply and the folder will open in an Opus Lister as normal. Exactly how such folders are displayed in Opus may depend on the settings in Folders - Virtual Folders.


Make Opus an Explorer Replacement and the default handler for all folders except those special places in the list below. Suggested items in this list may include the Control Panel and similar special places but any folder can be added to the excluded list below. All folders below will be opened in Windows Explorer not in Opus.

For best performance we recommend the second option above.

Note that these options ONLY apply when you access one of these folders or special places outside of Opus - that is, when you access a folder such as the Control Panel from the Start Menu or a Desktop shortcut etc. If you access these folders from within Opus, these settings do not apply and the folder will open in an Opus Lister as normal. Exactly how such folders are displayed in Opus may depend on the settings in Folders - Virtual Folders.


Displays the list of Special Places or Folders to be opened in Widows Explorer  not in Opus. For example, Control Panel,..


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Enables the display of top and bottom borders for each Toolbar and menu. These can be turned off to provide a smoother look depending on the themes and layouts you wish to use.


Adopts the Office 2003 style of highlighting buttons and menu. Choose from the following colors and gradients.


To preserve the relative display of all images used in Toolbar buttons, this option scales the graphic images used in the Toolbar if they are larger than the standard size (20x20 or 30x30 depending on how Toolbar is set in customize).


Enable support for Windows XP theme (visual styles).


Define the horizontal padding in pixels to add between Toolbar images.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Define the vertical padding in pixels to add between Toolbar images.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Changes the type of highlighting used to display mouse-overs in menus. Windows style is blue highlighting, Opus style uses a 3D border.


Select the highlighting effect you wish to use for mouse overs of buttons. Similar settings are also available in the Customize - Toolbar settings and in the settings for each button itself. This is the master control and overrides the other settings


Define the horizontal spacing in pixels to add between Toolbar buttons.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Define the vertical spacing in pixels to add between Toolbar buttons.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Choose an item from the list.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Displays a list of the current folder tabs. The item in Bold is the active tab.


Enter your input in this field.


Click this button to make your choice.


Add a new folder to the tab list.


Remove the highlighted item from the Folder Tab list.


Move the selected item upwards in the list.


Move the selected item down in the list.


Make the selected item the active tab. This will display in bold. The active tab is the folder that will be opened by default when this Lister Style is selected.


Close any other existing folder tabs that are currently open in this Lister.


Always show Folder Tabs in the Listers. One Folder Tab will always be shown in the Lister for the current path.


This option improves evenness of the visual layout of the Folder Tabs in dual display Listers and will always show Folder Tabs in both file displays even if not required.


Only show Folder Tabs when needed when more than one item is open in a tab in a Lister.

Recommended.


Display the Folder Tabs on the top of the File Display instead of at the bottom.


Choose the desired size for the Folder Tab.


Enter your input in this field.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Makes the Folder Tabs the same size.


Automatically resize the Folder Tabs according to the length of the folder name.


Always use this fixed size for the Folder Tabs.


Enter your input in this field.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Enable the display of a small close button in the top right of the Folder Tab.


Defines the action for a double-click on an empty section of the Tab bar. Choose between opening a new tab showing either the Current folder, the default folder or a empty tab.


Choose an item from the list.


Displays a list of the Tab Groups you have defined and allows you to Add new Tab Groups or Edit, Duplicate or Remove the highlighted items from the defined groups.


Add a new Tab Group.


Duplicate the highlighted Tab Group.


Edit the highlighted Tab Group


Remove the highlighted Tab Group.


Sets the Close button on the file display to just close this tab, not the Lister.


Choose an item from the list.


Check your desired options.


Choose an item from the list.


Displays the categories of the Opus Preference system. Select the item to access the properties on the right.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes according to the setting above.


Closes Preferences and discards any changes you have made.


Immediately applies the changes you have made to Preferences but do not close the dialog.


Shows the list of Opus pop-up context menus. You may edit these menus to add your own favorite programs or Opus commands.


Browse for an Opus Toolbar to use as the selected Opus pop-up menu.


Shows or Hides the selected menu.


Restores the selected menu to the state when you entered Customize.


Restores the selected menu to the Opus system default values.


Drag the slider to select your preferred value.


Encrypt the archive with a password.


Enter your password for this archive.


Safety check for your typing!


Re-enter the password to verify your typing.


Hide the password with asterisks and do not show the password in plain text.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes.


Extract this file from the archive.


Selects the width of the thumbnail images in pixels.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Selects the height of the thumbnail images in pixels.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Adjust sizes to create a square thumbnail.


Defines the background color to be used to fill the thumbnail background and the surrounding area if the thumbnail is smaller than the defined area.


Instead of displaying the full colored image, restricts the number of colors used to gray scale of 256. This provides for faster thumbnail display when handling images with large numbers of colors such as those from digital cameras.


Displays the file type icon for the associated program for registered file types or a default icon if not.


By default, Opus displays an icon showing the type of file. However, if the file type has not been registered in the system and associated with a given program, then a default icon is used. This option disables the default icon.


Thumbnails are normally decoded and shown progressively only when made visible in the Lister window. This option loads ALL thumbnail images automatically to give a faster display when scrolling around a Lister containing many thumbnails.


Opus can display icons drawn for the Amiga computer system. This allows you to choose the default palette to be used to map the icon images. These icons are useful as Toolbar icons since there are thousands of these available from public domain sources such as AmiNet.


Amiga icon images often do not have a surrounding border. This option adds a border.


Natively, Opus understands only file types for common image types such as GIF, JPEG, BMP etc. This option tells Opus to ask the Operating System to display a thumbnail image for files it does not understand. This is useful for thumbnails from files such as HTML, WORD documents etc. Alternatively, Opus will display a blank thumbnail.


Allows for better performance on multi-processor systems when generating thumbnails by using multiple threads to decode multiple images at the same time. When enabled, Opus creates N+1 threads to read thumbnails, where N is the number of CPUs in the machine.


Selects the spacing between the thumbnail images in pixels.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Selects the spacing between the thumbnail images in pixels.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Enable extra label lines for the thumbnails.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Enable the activation of AVI in thumbnail images. If supported by the system codec, the thumbnails will display a small version of the AVI movie.


As well as the file name, show the image and file size in the label underneath the file name.


Also display thumbnails for folders similar to Windows XP.


Read the contents of the folder and generate small thumbnails showing the contents of the folder. Similar to Windows XP.


Enable high quality image scaling algorithm to provide better thumbnails.


Digital camera images usually contain embedded EXIF information giving extended information about the image. Depending on the manufacturer of the camera, this may contain information about the orientation of the camera at the time of the image was taken. If this is present, Opus can automatically rotate images to the correct orientation.


Enable the Opus thumbnail caching mechanism. Thumbnails can be displayed much faster from the internal cache rather than have to be re-calculated each time they are viewed.


Details of the Thumbnail cache.


Check your desired options.


Enables sounds for all Opus events as defined below.


Displays a list of Opus events for which sounds are available. A sound file has been defined for the event when it is shown in bold text.


Browse for a sound file for the selected event.


Clears the sound file for the selected event.


Shows the system properties of the sound file for the selected event.


Plays the selected sound.


Stops playing the selected sound.


Clears all the currently defined events and reset all values to blank.


Adds extra menu items for New Lister and Opus Preferences to the right mouse button context menu on the system Desktop.


Adds an Opus lightbulb icon to the Taskbar Status Area or system tray menu. This allows you to quickly access the Opus Tray menus by a right click of the mouse over the icon. The menus are defined in the Tray Icon Menu from Customize.


Adds an extra menu, Open in DOpus, to the right mouse button context menu of all folders. This means that from Windows Explorer or the Desktop you can quickly open the folder in a new Opus Lister.


By default, Windows allows external programs to add items to the context menu of all or selected file types. After you have installed a number of programs these can be distracting. This option hides these items and only displays specific Opus menus as defined by the Opus file type system. If you hold down the SHIFT key when you bring up the context menu, Opus will override this setting to perform the action opposite to that set.


Makes Opus the default handler for all FTP sites. Accessing a path such as FTP:// will activate Opus and display the site in an Opus Lister.


Add a special icon to the Desktop allowing you to quickly open your File Collections. A File Collection can contain files in different folders, on different disks, on remote network drives, within ZIP files and even on remote FTP sites. However they appear in the Lister and can be viewed and managed as if they were all in the same physical location,


Add Opus icons to the Control panel allowing you to access Opus Preferences and Opus Customize from the Control Panel.


This option lets you enable or disable Opus support for the Windows XP CD writing system. You may wish to disable this if you are using third-party CD writing software.


If support for the Windows XP CD writing system is enabled, this option controls whether Opus uses its own display when viewing the contents of writable CDs, or the system virtual folder. If this option is enabled, then Opus will always display the virtual folder for writable CDs rather than using its own display modes. If turned off, Opus will only display the virtual folder if the CD is empty, or Opus is operating in Explorer replacement mode, and the Lister was invoked automatically by Windows (for example, in response to you clicking the "There are files waiting to be written to the CD" bubble.)


Add a special menu to the SendTo context menu allowing you to quickly copy files to your File Collections. A File Collection can contain files in different folders, on different disks, on remote network drives, within ZIP files and even on remote FTP sites. However they appear in the Lister and can be viewed and managed as if they were all in the same physical location.


Opus normally shows a progress window when performing actions. For actions which take only a few moments this can be intrusive. This option prevents the display of such windows for actions which complete in less than 800ms or as defined below.


Functions in Opus are performed independently of the Lister itself. By default, once the Lister has dispatched the function, Opus deselects all the selected files. This can be unwanted if the action is likely to fail. This option delays the deselection until the function has completed. Note however, if you access the Lister before the function returns, the files will NOT be deselected at all.


Displays the percentage complete for the current action in the progress title bar.


Defines the delay in milliseconds before Opus displays progress indicators for file operations.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


By default, Opus automatically adds new and modified files to the file list in sorted order. Other programs such as Windows Explorer add new files to the end of the list. Turn this option off to emulate Windows Explorer.


Add automatic numbering of files renamed inline.


When a folder is displayed in a Lister, Opus ordinarily uses "file notification" to detect changes to that folder that occur outside of Opus (for example, in Explorer). This can, however, result in reduced performance during extended file operations, particularly for networked devices. If you turn this option off, Opus will no longer monitor network folders for file changes (except those made by Opus itself.)


Define the image file format to use for clipboard images when you paste an image into a Lister.


Displays a list of the previously saved Opus Lister Layouts.


Saves the current Layout of Opus Listers under a given name.


Loads a previously saved Layout.


Allows you to rename the selected Layout.


Deletes the selected Layout.


By default, Opus leaves the current Listers open when opening a new Layout. This option closes all current Listers before opening a new Layout.


Sets these attributes in the selected files if you have permission to do so.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Clears these attributes in the selected files if you have permission to do so.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Apply the above changes to all files within the selected sub-folders.


Use the following filter or Advanced filter to selectively access files.


Enter a wildcard pattern or the name of the advanced filter file to use as the filter criteria. Possible wildcards are *,#, ?, |, (), [], ~ or single quote. See the manual for further details of the Pattern Matching Syntax.


Displays the Filter dialog to allow you to define a set of criteria for the filter.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes made.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes.


If supported by the remote server with the MDTM command, sets the file date & time of the selected files to the following values.


Changes the setting to the current system time and date.


Displays the Unix protection bits in OCTAL for the file. You can change this value if required by entering numeric values.


Displays the Unix protection bits in OCTAL for the file. You can change this value if required by entering numeric values.


Displays the list of defined FTP Sites. Functions including cut, copy, paste, create new folder, create shortcut are available from the context menu over an individual site entry. You may also drag a site entry out of this list and drop it on the Desktop to create a shortcut.


Creates a new FTP site entry. Extra functions including cut, copy, paste, create new folder, create shortcut are available from the context menu over an individual site entry. You may also drag a site entry out of the list and drop it on the Desktop to create a shortcut.


Deletes the selected FTP site entry.


Takes the settings for this section from those defined in the Default Settings in the FTP Site list.


Restores the settings of this section to the system defaults.


Displays intermediate progress windows during login and read directory functions.


Unix systems often have extra files beginning with a dot. This option hides such files in the Lister.


Displays the informative messages provided by the remote server when you enter a directory. These are displayed in the Opus Output Window under the FTP Log associated with this Site entry.


Displays the informative messages provided when you first connect to a remote server. These are displayed in the Opus Output Window under the FTP Log associated with this Site entry.


Unix systems often have links to files and directories. Usually Opus will be able to work out whether these are to files or directories. Unknown links can be treated as either. Select the desired option. By default, they are treated as links to directories.


Directories on FTP servers are often accessed through relative links so the path to the directory may not be an absolute path. This option adjusts for a logical parent directory.


Takes the settings for this section from those defined in the Default Settings in the FTP Site list.


Displays a session log of responses from the remote server in the Opus Output Window FTP Log.


Enables the display of both outgoing FTP commands and incoming responses plus other extended information in the session log.


Displays the session log, if any, in the FTP #1 section of the Opus Output Window.


Displays the session log, if any, in the FTP #2 section of the Opus Output Window.


Your chosen name for this Site.


The IP or host address of the remote FTP server.


The port number used for FTP on the remote server. By default, this is port 21 but SSH uses port 22 and some SSL connections may use port 990.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Logs in as an anonymous user or uses the defined user name and password below.


Your user or login name on the remote FTP server.


Your password on the remote FTP server.


Opus attempts to CD to this directory when it first connects to the remote server. Leave blank to access the default FTP root directory for the server. If you select to remember the last accessed directory (Network Settings), Opus updates this field with the current directory path when you close the connection to the site.


Opus can adjust the reported file dates for the time zone of the remote server. This time zone information is also used when transferring files to and from the remote site. NOTE: Opus will attempt to set the file dates when you copy files to a remote site but this action may not be supported by all FTP servers.


Select the type of connection to establish with the remote FTP server. Depending on the product license purchased, this can include Secure FTP connections as well as the standard FTP connection. Two methods of Secure FTP supported:

Secure FTP via SSL : Both Implicit and Explicit Secure FTP connections are supported. Implicit means the client (Opus) issues an AUTH command and asks for an SSL connection. Explicit means the client assumes the server is running a SSL connection on port 990 and attempts to immediately open a connection. Implicit connections are recommended. If the SSL connection is not accepted, then the FTP connection will fail. For security reasons it will not auto-fall back to a non-secure connection. Instead, an error message will inform you that a secure connection could not be established.

SSH / SFTP over SSH on port 22 : Based on the Putty system. Opus provides a seamless integration of the SSH connection type on port 22 and FTP over that connection as if it were a normal FTP connection. The SFTP protocol is more limited than normal FTP and some options in the FTP settings do not apply to SSH - these will be ghosted when this connection type is chosen.


Selects the time zone. Note that the first entry is a special entry for Serv-U ftp servers and Opus can query the remote server for the actual time zone and set this automatically.


Adjust the time zone for daylight saving.


Takes the settings for this section from those defined in the Default Settings in the FTP Site list.


Many FTP servers provide index files containing short descriptions of files and directory contents. This option attempts to download recognized files automatically and display this information in the Description field of the files in the Lister.


Restricts the size of the index file to be downloaded automatically. If the size is greater than defined, Opus will use the setting below to decide what action should be taken.


Defines the maximum size for automatic download of the index file.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Selects the action to be taken if the index file is greater than defined above. Either ignore or ask before download.


Takes the settings for this section from those defined in the Default Settings in the FTP Site list.


Restores the settings of this section to the system defaults.


Many FTP servers provide index files containing short descriptions of files and directory contents. This option attempts to download recognized files automatically and display this information in the Description field of the files in the Lister.


Restricts the size of the index file to be downloaded automatically. if the size is greater than defined, Opus will use the setting below to decide what action should be taken.


Defines the maximum size for automatic download of the index file.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Selects the action to be taken if the index file is greater than defined above. Either ignore or ask before download.


Defines the names of the index files which Opus will recognize. If found, the highest priority file will be downloaded automatically according to the settings above.


Enter or change the name of index file for the selected item above.


Adds the defined name to the list of recognized files.


Deletes the selected name from the Match list.


Defines the names of the index files which Opus will ignore.


Enter or change the name of index file for the selected item above.


Adds the defined name to the list of files to ignore.


Deletes the selected name from the Ignore list.


Select the starting byte position in the index file where the file name description information is stored.


Takes the settings for this section from those defined in the Default Settings in the FTP Site list.


Restores the settings of this section to the system defaults.


Some FTP servers allow special file names beginning with a space character. Such files are often not displayed by many FTP clients but Opus displays such files if this option is selected.


Remembers the last directory accessed. When you disconnect from the remote server, the current directory will be transferred to the Initial Directory field of the Site entry and Opus will attempt to CD to this path when you next connect to this site.


Forces Opus to re-read the remote directory after you have copied a file. This ensures that the Lister display is always synchronized with the remote directory contents. This option is slower but preserves the integrity of the directory listing.


Enable this option if the remote server is behind a firewall. Transfer of data from a remote server can either use active connections (PORT mode), where Opus tells the remote site to connect to a specific data port on your machine, or passive connections (PASV mode) where Opus asks the server to supply a data port. If your computer or the server is behind a firewall, you may not be able to establish an active data connection. When using Windows ICS connection sharing on a local network, you may also find that active mode does not function reliably resulting in timeouts on PORT commands.  Passive mode is selected as the default.


The network timeout in seconds. Usually leave at the default value unless you have excessive timeouts on connections. In such cases, you may be better to try PASV mode connections.


The network timeout in seconds. Usually leave at the default value unless you have excessive timeouts on connections. In such cases, you may be better to try PASV mode connections.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Takes the settings for this section from those defined in the Default Settings in the FTP Site list.


If Opus cannot connect to a server, it will retry the connection up to this number of times before abandoning the attempt.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


The delay in seconds between retries.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


If the connection is lost, Opus attempts to reconnect to the server automatically.


Most FTP servers will close the connection after a period of inactivity of approximately 2-5 minutes. This attempts to keep the connection alive by sending default packets every so often. This is not supported by some FTP servers. NOTE: Such behavior can block the site from other users and can be viewed as anti-social. It is a better practice to connect to the site, perform the desired functions then disconnect, rather than attempt to keep the link alive for long periods.


The delay between sending keep alive packets.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Opus supports the transfer of files directly between two remote FTP servers. This is known as Site-Site transfer. Unfortunately, not all servers support this. If this option is enabled, Opus attempts to DOWNLOAD files from this site directly to the other. If not enabled, Opus will download the data to your local computer first and then upload it to the other site - a much slower process.


Takes the settings for this section from those defined in the Default Settings in the FTP Site list.


Opus supports the transfer of files directly between two remote FTP servers. This is known as Site-Site transfer. Unfortunately, not all servers support this. If this option is enabled, Opus attempts to UPLOAD files to this site directly from the other. If not enabled, Opus will download the data to your local computer first and then upload it to the other site - a much slower process.


Takes the settings for this section from those defined in the Default Settings in the FTP Site list.


Restores the settings of this section to the system defaults.


Plays a sound if a login to an FTP server is successful but takes longer than the Activation time. Sounds are defined in Opus Preferences and must be enabled.


Do not play the sound if the action took less than this time.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Plays a sound if the login to an FTP server fails and takes longer than the Activation time. Sounds are defined in Opus Preferences and must be enabled.


Do not play the sound if the action took less than this time.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Plays a sound if an FTP copy is successful but took longer than the Activation time. Sounds are defined in Opus Preferences and must be enabled.


Do not play the sound if the action took less than this time.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Plays a sound if an FTP file copy fails but took longer than the Activation time. Sounds are defined in Opus Preferences and must be enabled.


Do not play the sound if the action took less than this time.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Plays a sound if an error is reported for an FTP command. Sounds are defined in Opus Preferences and must be enabled.


Enter your input in this field.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Plays a sound if the connection to the FTP server is lost. Sounds are defined in Opus Preferences and must be enabled.


Enter your input in this field.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Plays a sound if a timeout occurs with an FTP command. Sounds are defined in Opus Preferences and must be enabled.


Enter your input in this field.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Restores the settings of this section to the system defaults.


Defines the password to be used when using an anonymous login to an FTP server.


Connect to the FTP server via a (local) proxy server as defined below.


Defines the type of FTP proxy server in use on your local network.


The IP or host address of the local FTP Proxy server.


The port used by the local FTP Proxy server.


The user name to login to the local FTP proxy server if required.


The password required to login to the local FTP proxy server if required.


Some proxy servers support a login such as username<delimiter>host etc. This field defines the delimiter character. By default this is set as the character @.


Passwords in Opus FTP sites lists can be hidden or shown in plain text. This allows passwords to be show in plain text.


The global password allows you to change hidden Opus FTP Site settings. If set, this is required before other passwords may be shown in plain text. By default the default password is set to "password".


Select this option to remember the passwords used in the FTP Quick connect dialog. If not selected, passwords are discarded once a connection has been established.


Defines the size of the FTP log file in Kilobytes.


By default, the FTP Log is recorded only when the Output Window is open. This option tells Opus to always record the FTP log whether the Output Window is open or not.


Choose the font to be used for the FTP log.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Downloads this file to the destination Lister or path.


File information plus any description supplied by this directory's index file.


Sets the Unix protection bit 0x0400 for the file, if you have permission.


Sets the Unix protection bit 0x0200 for the file, if you have permission


Sets the Unix protection bit 0x0100 for the file, if you have permission.


Sets the Unix protection bit 0x0040 for the file, if you have permission.


Sets the Unix protection bit 0x0020 for the file, if you have permission.


Sets the Unix protection bit 0x0010 for the file, if you have permission.


Sets the Unix protection bit 0x004 for the file, if you have permission.


Sets the Unix protection bit 0x002 for the file, if you have permission.


Sets the Unix protection bit 0x001 for the file, if you have permission.


Displays the Unix protection bits in OCTAL for the file. You can change this value if required by entering numeric values.


Defines the maximum number of folder paths to keep in the history.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Often you will traverse folders to reach a final path. By default, if the Recent List is enabled, Opus keeps the full history of all folders accessed. This tells Opus to remember only those important folders where you performed a specific action on a file such as copy, delete, rename etc and ignore folders where no action took place.


Selects whether to include system namespaces (Virtual Folders) in the list of Recent files.


Select the number of folders to remember in the Lister history. This affects the depth of the folder cache used in the FWD and BACK navigation buttons.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Enables the Opus SmartFavorites (tm) system and adds the most popular folders to the Opus Smart Favorites list.  This is a system where Opus monitors the actions performed in each folder and automatically adds the most popular folders to the Opus Favorites list when the folder records sufficient activity above the threshold defined in the section below.


The maximum number of folders to display in the SmartFavorites list.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


The number of points a folder must record to be considered for the SmartFavorites list. Points are recorded on a Lister action not a file-by-file basis so only one set of points is scored by a folder irrespective of the number of files selected when an action is performed.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


The maximum number of folders to monitor for SmartFavorite activity. This is the pool from which the top set of SmartFavorites are chosen.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Often folders are temporary, have been deleted, or are generally no longer available in the system. Opus can check for these on startup and automatically delete them from the SmartFavorite system.


Number of points recorded when files are copied to the clipboard from this folder.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when files are cut to the clipboard from this folder.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when files are copied from this folder.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when files are copied to this folder.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when a new folder is created in this folder.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when files are deleted from this folder.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when you double-click on a file or folder in this folder.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when a GetSizes command is performed on folders in this folder.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when files are joined or split in this folder.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when files are moved from this folder.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when files are moved into this folder.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when files are pasted into this folder.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when files are renamed in this folder.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when external programs are run (launched) from this folder.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when you change the attributes of files in this folder.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when you show any picture files (with SHOW in the Opus viewer) or play any sound files (with the PLAY command) from this folder.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when you display the files in this folder in thumbnail mode.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Number of points recorded when you transit this folder on the way to another path.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Opens a new Opus Lister when you double-click the left mouse button on a clear area of the Desktop.


Opens a pre-defined Opus Layout of Listers when you double-click the left mouse button on a clear area of the Desktop.


Selects the Layout to open from those recorded within Opus.


Closes any open Listers before opening a new Layout.


When using an Active Desktop, many system events are handled directly by Windows. This setting allows Opus to detect a double-click on the Desktop even if it is in Active Desktop mode.


Run the defined Opus command when you double-click on a clear area of the Desktop.


Selects the Opus User command to run from those pre-defined within Opus.


Opens a new Opus Lister when you double-click the Opus Taskbar icon.


Opens a pre-defined Opus Layout of Listers when you double-click the Opus Taskbar icon.


Selects the Layout to open from those recorded within Opus.


Closes any open Listers before opening a new Layout.


Run the defined Opus command when you double-click the Opus Taskbar icon.


Selects the Opus User command to run from those pre-defined within Opus.


Enter the IP address or resolved name of the remote FTP server.


Recalls the details from the last closed connection.


The port number used for FTP on the remote site. By default, this is port 21. For SSH connections this is 22 and for Explicit SSL this is often 990.


Login as an anonymous user or with the defined user name and password below.


Your user name on the remote FTP server.


Your password on the remote FTP server.


Opus attempts to CD to this directory when it first connects to the remote server. Leave blank to access the default FTP root directory for the server.


Closes this dialog and attempt to connect to the server.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Select the type of connection to establish with the remote FTP server. Depending on the product license purchased, this can include Secure FTP connections as well as the standard FTP connection. Two methods of Secure FTP supported:

Secure FTP via SSL : Both Implicit and Explicit Secure FTP connections are supported. Implicit means the client (Opus) issues an AUTH command and asks for an SSL connection. Explicit means the client assumes the server is running a SSL connection on port 990 and attempts to immediately open a connection. Implicit connections are recommended. If the SSL connection is not accepted, then the FTP connection will fail. For security reasons it will not auto-fall back to a non-secure connection. Instead, an error message will inform you that a secure connection could not be established.

SSH / SFTP over SSH on port 22 : Based on the Putty system. Opus provides a seamless integration of the SSH connection type on port 22 and FTP over that connection as if it were a normal FTP connection. The SFTP protocol is more limited than normal FTP and some options in the FTP settings do not apply to SSH - these will be ghosted when this connection type is chosen.


Apply any changes to this site for use with this session only. When you disconnect this session or close the Lister all changes will be discarded.


Apply any changes for use with this session and permanently update the site preferences.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes made.


Apply any changes according to the setting above but do not close the dialog.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes.


Free floating Toolbars can be moved to any position on the Desktop. This allows them to be docked with the top, bottom or sides of the Desktop when the Toolbar is moved to the edge of the display. Holding down the SHIFT key when moving the Toolbar will reverse the defined behavior.


Activates the display of an informative pop-up help text (called a Tooltip) for all Toolbar buttons.


Shows any shortcut keys defined for the button in the Tooltip text.


You may set the free-floating state of individual Toolbars from their individual settings in Customize. This automatically saves this state of the Toolbar when you close the Toolbar or exit Opus. It is useful if you have dragged a Toolbar out of or into a Lister and not specifically saved its state.


Usually enabled to allow an ALT left mouse button click on a Toolbar to immediately enter Customize mode. Some KVM switches are reported to not allow the ALT qualifier key to be reported correctly.


Customize mode consists of multiple dialogs. Select this option to minimize the main Customize dialog making it easier to edit the selected button or menu.


A three way selection option to define how Opus displays the menus, either immediately or with animation.


Lock the Toolbars and prevent them being moved around the Lister display.


Enable a drop shadow effect.


Enables support for Windows XP themes in Toolbars.


Displays a list of the file types defined for the Windows system.


Allows you to edit the selected file type.


Defines a new file type.


Creates a new file type using a copy of the selected file type.


Deletes the selected file type.


Finds a file type which matches given criteria.


Change the default application which opens this type of file.


Your user name for the remote FTP server.


Your password for the remote FTP server.


Closes this dialog and attempts to connect to the remote server.


Closes this dialog and abandons the attempt to connect to the server.


Displays the name of the FTP site or IP address or resolved name.


Permanently saves the password for this site in the site configuration (if any) after a successful connection.


Login as an anonymous user or use the defined user name and password below.


Applies this format to the current Lister and closes this dialog.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes made.


Save the current folder format for this specific folder path only, or save this as a default for all folders.


Clear the saved format for this specific folder path only, or clear formats for all folders.


Clear the saved format and reset the format to the global default settings, or a custom format you have previously stored, or choose to reset it to one of the defined Favorite formats.


Click this button to make your choice.


Display a list of the unused fields (columns) which may be used in the Lister file display.


Moves the selected item from the Available list to the Displayed list.


Removes the selected item from the Displayed list.


Moves the selected item up in the order of fields to be displayed. This moves the field column to the left in the Lister display


Moves the selected item down the order of fields to be displayed. This moves the field column to the right in the Lister display


Display the list of the fields (columns) currently used in the Lister file display.


Restores the settings in this section to the Opus system defaults.


Check your desired options.


Select the Category to display or select All to show all entries.


Defines the column by which the Lister display will be sorted. Select from one of the available column fields in the display.


Reverses the order of the sort.


Sorts numbers numerically rather than alphabetically. This ensures that files beginning with numbers will sort in their correct order. For example, 1,2,10 would be sorted in this order rather than 1,10,2.


By default, Opus uses a traditional string sort which sorts items on the ASCII value of the character. This is usually more logical when sorting lists of files. Some programs such as Windows Explorer, use a word sort. This treats hyphens and apostrophes differently than it treats other symbols that are not alphanumeric. It ensures that words such as "coop" and "co-op" stay together within a sorted list. Choose the option according to your preference. (Note that the default string sort uses lexicographic order which may vary with non-English languages.)


Selects the View Mode to display files and folders in the Lister. Select from traditional Windows views, Opus Power mode or Opus thumbnails.


Automatically adjusts the size of the columns to fit the widest field.


 By default, Opus displays the full file name including the extension. This hides the file extensions.


 Select how to display files and folders. Either display all folders before files, all files before folders. or files and folders intermixed as defined by the sort order.


Group duplicate files and display together.


Enter your input in this field.


Only show files which match this pattern. Possible wildcards are *,#, ?, |, (), [], ~ or single quote.

See the manual for further details of the Pattern Matching Syntax.


Selectively show files with the Read Only attribute set.


Selectively show files with the Archive attribute set.


Selectively show files with the Hidden attribute set.


Selectively show files with the System attribute set.


Selectively hide files which match this pattern. Possible wildcards are *,#, ?, |, (), [], ~ or single quote. For example, *.tmp would hide all tmp files. Entering a single asterisk * will hide ALL files.

See the manual for further details of the Pattern Matching Syntax.


Selectively hide files with the Read Only attribute set


Selectively hide files with the Archive attribute set.


Selectively hide files with the Hidden attribute set.


Selectively hide files with the System attribute set.


Selectively show files with the Encrypted attribute set.


Selectively show files with the Compressed attribute set.


Selectively hide files with the Encrypted attribute set.


Selectively hide files with the Compressed attribute set.


Check your desired options.


Only show FOLDERS which match this pattern. Possible wildcards are *,#, ?, |, (), [], ~ or single quote.

See the manual for further details of the Pattern Matching Syntax.


Check your desired options.


Selectively hide folders which match this pattern. Possible wildcards are *,#, ?, |, (), [], ~ or single quote. Entering a single asterisk * will hide ALL folders.

See the manual for further details of the Pattern Matching Syntax.


When a directory is read, the folder sizes are calculated and displayed in the Lister according to this setting. You can choose Automatic and Opus will use a background process to calculate the sizes after the directory has been read. If you choose manual, you can quickly calculate the folder size for any given folder with the GetSizes command. By default this is accessed by an ALT-Click on the folder or from the middle mouse action on the default CreateFolder button on the default Toolbar.


If a folder does not have a defined Lister format, it will normally be displayed using the Default Lister format. This tells Opus to use the current format for any sub-folders. Note: If the padlock button in the Status Bar is closed, Opus will always use the current format to display folders contents.


Select the background image to use for this type of folder.


Select the image to use as a background for this folder.


Select how to display the background image.


Define the percentage of files of this type to be present in the folder for this Content type to be applied.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


If other formats also match the files in the folder, include their matching field columns in the file display. The columns used in the resulting display will be an amalgam of those from all matching file types.


Selects the default folder path to be used as the initial folder for the primary (Source) Lister display


Erases the default path.


Enter the path required for the primary file display in a Dual File Display Lister.


Choose the folder path from the highest-ranking SmartFavorites folder.


Selects the default folder path to be used as the initial folder for the secondary (Destination) Lister display in a dual filed Lister.


Erases the default path.


Enter the path required for the second file display in a Dual File Display Lister.


Uses the same folder path for the secondary Lister as used for the primary file display.


Chooses the folder path from the highest-ranking SmartFavorites folder.


If the initial path of a new Lister is set to a folder on a CD-ROM, do not automatically read its contents.  This can be useful in preventing the delays resulting from attempting to access a CD-ROM which is no longer mounted on your computer.


If the initial path of a new Lister is set to a folder on a floppy drive or other removable media, do not automatically read its contents.


If the initial path of a new Lister is set to a folder on an FTP Site, do not automatically read its contents. If this option is not set, Opus will attempt to connect to the site and read the initial directory.


If the initial path of a new Lister is set to a folder on a networked drive, do not automatically read its contents.  This can be useful to prevent delays if the network drive is no longer connected to your computer.


If one of the above selected types is defined as the initial folder of a new Lister, ask me before attempting to access the path.


Allows you to adjust the behavior of left mouse button in Opus Power mode.


Allows you to select what happens when you drag and drop files using the left mouse button in Opus Power mode.


Allows you to adjust the behavior of the right mouse button in Opus Power mode.


Allows you to select what happens when you drag and drop files using the right mouse button in Opus Power mode.


Allows you to adjust the behavior of middle mouse button, if any, in Opus Power mode. Note: With three button mice, the middle button is often controlled by an external driver and is not available for Opus use.


Allows you to select what happens when you drag and drop files using the middle mouse button in Opus Power mode.  Note: With three button mice, the middle button is often controlled by an external driver and is not available for Opus use.


Automatically displays the associated file type icon on the left of the file name.


You can select multiple files by first selecting one file then, with a qualifier key held down, selecting a file some distance away. All files between the first and second selection points will be highlighted. This setting allows you to configure the qualifier key used for the range selection process. Select either the SHIFT, Ctrl or Alt key.

Note that in default Power mode, if you have selected assorted files, you may pick up all selected files in one action so as to drag them etc by holding down SHIFT PLUS Ctrl keys when you click in the Lister to drag the files.


 Select the key to be used to assist with range selection, either SHIFT, Ctrl or Alt key.


Allows you to drag out just a single file from the Lister if multiple files have already been selected.


Activate Keyboard mode allowing navigation when you have partially typed a file name which matches one in the folder.


Permanently activate Keyboard mode allowing navigation using keys. Otherwise keyboard mode is activated or deactivated when you tap the CTRL key.


Pressing the Enter key when files are selected will open (perform the default action) on ALL selected files.


In the traditional Details modes, to select a file or folder you must click on the actual file name itself.  This option allows you to select a file or folder by clicking anywhere on the row.


Normally, when you press a key in a Power or Details mode Lister, the focus is moved to the first file or folder matching that key. However, if the Lister is sorted by a column other than name, it is that column that is used to select a file. For example, if sorted by the Type column, pressing the letter M would select the first file whose type began with the letter M. You can use this option to disable this behavior.


In the traditional Details modes, to select a file or folder you must click on the actual file name itself.  This option allows you to select a file or folder by clicking anywhere on the row.


Normally, when you press a key in a Power or Details mode Lister, the focus is moved to the first file or folder matching that key. However, if the Lister is sorted by a column other than name, it is that column that is used to select a file. For example, if sorted by the Type column, pressing the letter M would select the first file whose type began with the letter M. You can use this option to disable this behavior.


Shows the current arguments used to display the status bar at the bottom of the Lister.


Displays the available codes for the status bar arguments.


Shows an example of how the status bar will be displayed using the arguments above.


Displays predefined samples for configuring the status bar arguments.


Activates the display of separate status bars at the bottom of the Lister display when you are viewing a dual file display.


Prints the listing of the folder contents to the defined destination and closes this dialog.


Closes this dialog.


Browse for the desired folder.


Recursively includes all sub-folders in the listing.


Use the selected filter to selectively display the folder contents.


Enter a wildcard pattern or the name of the advanced filter file to use as the filter criteria. Possible wildcards are *,#, ?, |, (), [], ~ or single quote. See the manual for further details of the Pattern Matching Syntax.


Displays the Filter dialog to allow you to define a set of criteria for the filter.


Outputs the listing to the defined printer.


Selects the required printer from those available on this system.


Displays the configuration dialog for this printer.


Outputs the listing as a text file under the defined name.


Browse for a file.


Displays the current format to be used to display the folder contents.


Edits the current format to be used to display the folder contents.


If you have edited the format, this is not automatically accepted as the current format to be used for the listing. This sets the listing format to use the current format as shown.


Resets the displayed format from the current format being used for the listing.


Selects the font to be used for the printed listing.


Calculate and display the folder sizes of all sub-folders in the selected directory. (Performs a GetSizes command on the folders before printing.)


Outputs the listing as a text file to the clipboard. You can subsequently Paste this into an application. (Or an Opus Lister to create a "clipboard.txt" file containing the folder listing.)


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Defines the filter equation. Enter the details for the selection from the available choices. You can have just one matching clause or multiple lines to further refine and tighten your selections. For details see the manual sections on Opus File Filter System, Pattern Matching Syntax and Regular Expression Syntax.


After this function has completed, turns off the filter for all subsequent file functions.


Immediately performs the filter action above and selects all files which match the criteria above.


Immediately performs the file function but ignores the defined filer for this operation.


Closes this dialog and applies the filter as above.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes.


Displays the current file name or file name pattern to match. You may ONLY use a simple pattern which allows a single asterisk wildcard or full regular expression syntax. For example, to add the prefix "Old" to all your JPG files, enter a simple pattern "*.JPG" in the old name field and "Old*.JPG" in the new name field.


Displays the replacement file name or the file name pattern if wildcard asterisk is used.  If in doubt on what patterns to use, try Test mode or use the preview pane of the Advanced Rename dialog to see what would happen with different patterns before committing the action for real. Also remember that you can always reverse rename actions with the Opus Undo function.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Skip the rename for this specific file and move on to the next selection, if any.


Abort the rename process and close the dialog.


Click this button to make your choice.


Name of the ZIP file.


Browse for the ZIP file.


Drag the slider to select your preferred value


Encrypt the archive with a password.


Enter your password for this archive.


Safety check for your typing!


Re-enter the password to verify your typing.


Hide the password with asterisks and do not show the password in plain text.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog and discards any changes.


Hot keys can be either local to Opus (meaning that they will only work when Opus is active), or they can be System-wide and always available unless overridden by an external application.


The name you wish to give to this Hotkey.


A text string describing the action of the key.


Defines the shortcut key or Hotkey to activate this button if any. Simply activate this field and press the key or key combination desired. You may use any combination of any single key including function keys edit keys, keypad keys or normal keys either alone or in combination with qualifier keys including Shift, Ctrl, Alt, and Windows keys.


Displays the Opus command function and any arguments or the application program selected for the button.


Browse for an application file.


Sets the home or program folder when launching an application.


Click this button to make your choice.


Select the way you wish to run this application.


Enter your input in this field.


Select the predefined Opus function to use for this command, or use Advanced to enter more details plus arguments.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Click this button to make your choice.


Play the sound.


Stop playing the sound.


Rewind the play counter to the start.


Drag the slider to select the position from where to start playing the sound.


Play the next sound file.


Play the previous sound file


Stop playing the sound and close the dialog.


Closes the window after playing the sound. If you wish to manually control the player, turn this setting off. Changing this setting puts the player in manual mode for the session so it will not close automatically.


When you double-click on a file, Opus attempts to open the file with the program associated with this type of file in the system file types. If the type is not registered, Opus examines the file to check if it is plain ASCII text and opens it in the default text viewer if so.


Defines the text viewer to be used to show ASCII text files. This is set to Notepad by default.


Browse for a text viewer application.


Opus will use its internal PLAY command to play WAV sound files in place of the system defined media player.


Opus will use its internal picture viewer to show all image types it recognizes. These include GIF, JPG, IFF, PNG, BMP and more. This setting will override any program associated with this type of file in the system file types. If Opus cannot recognize the file, it will call the associated program for this image type.  If you have a favorite viewer, you can adjust this setting to keep your existing viewer, or you can allow Opus to display certain types of files for speed but still retain access to your older viewer through the file context menu.


Enables the local caching of downloaded FTP files. For example, if you double-clicked an image file on a remote FTP site, that file has to be downloaded first inorder for Opus to display the image in the viewer. Normally, if you accessed this file again, it would need to be downloaded a second time before it could be used again. Caching allows Opus to keep a local copy of files for this defined time to provide faster access.


The time to keep temporary files. After this time the file will be automatically deleted.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Enables the local caching of files within ZIP archives. For example, if you double-clicked an image file inside a ZIP file, that file has to be extracted fomr the ZIP archive first inorder for Opus to display the image in the viewer. Normally, if you accessed this file again, it would need to be extracted a second time before it could be used again. Caching allows Opus to keep a local copy of files for this defined time to provide faster access.


The time to keep temporary files. After this time the file will be automatically deleted.


Use the arrows to select your preferred value.


Select the types of files to display in the internal Opus picture viewer on a double-click. If you have a favorite viewer, you can adjust this setting to keep your existing viewer, or, you can allow Opus to display certain types of files for speed but still retain access your older viewer through the file context menu.


When multiple items are selected, for example by a Range Select action, this option allows you to open all selected items. When turned off, only the single item on which the double-click was made will be opened.


Allows you to create multiple folders in the one operation. Enter the folder names to be created separated by commas, for example as "folder1, folder2, folder3" and so on. Note any spaces after a comma will be ignored. If you wish to create folders with leading spaces then you must do this one at a time.


After creating the new folder, change the path of the current source Lister to the new folder and display that folder.


Read new folder into a dual file display.


Create a new Folder Tab for this new folder.


Click this button to make your choice.


The text to search for.


The text with which to replace the matched text or pattern.


Check your desired options.


Check your desired options.


Select your preferred option.


Select your preferred option.


Find the next occurrence of the selected text.


Replace this single occurrence of the matching text.


Replace all matches without asking.


Abandon the replace function.


Copyright Notice

Directory Opus 8 for Windows and this manual are Copyright © GPSoftware, Brisbane 2001-2005. All rights reserved. Title, ownership rights and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE shall remain the property of GPSoftware.

No part of this publication or the accompanying software may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, manual or otherwise, or disclosed to any third party without the express written permission of GPSoftware, Australia.

Disclaimer

GPSoftware and its associated distributors make no representation or warranties with respect to the performance of the Software nor of the contents of this publication and specifically disclaim any implied warranties of merchandisable quality or fitness for any particular purpose. Further, GPSoftware reserves the right to revise the Software and this publication and to make changes to them from time to time without obligation of GPSoftware to notify any person or organization of such revisions or changes.

Illustrations in this publication are intended to be representations and may not be exact duplicates of the screen layouts generated by the Software.

License

GPSoftware provides this program and any updates under the terms set out below and licenses its use worldwide. You assume responsibility for the selection of the program to achieve your intended results, and for the installation, use and results obtained from the program.

Warranty

All care has been taken to ensure that the program performs the functions as set out in this manual. However, GPSoftware provides the program 'AS IS' and makes no express or implied warranties with respect to the software, its documentation, performance, fitness for a particular purpose, or merchantability. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the software is borne by you. Should the software prove defective, you and not GPSoftware assume the entire cost of any service and/or repair.

To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, in no event shall GPSoftware or its suppliers be liable for any special, incidental, indirect, or consequential damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, damages for loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, loss of data, or any other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use of or inability to use the software product, even if GPSoftware has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

At the discretion of GPSoftware, any and all warranty or technical support is available only to the original purchaser of this package. Please contact your local GPSoftware distributor in your local country for Technical Support in the first instance.

Program License

Directory Opus 8 is supplied under the following conditions. If you do not agree to abide by these conditions, you must return the package to the place of purchase together with the disk package unopened and a full refund will be given. You accept responsibility for the serial numbered version of the software supplied in this package.

You may only install the software on the number of machines for which you have purchased a software license. Various levels of licences are available. The basic level license is a single machine installation license which allows the installation of the software on one machine only. Installation or usage on more than one machine requires that a license be purchased for each machine on which the software is to be installed.

You may a) Use the software on one microcomputer at a specific site only, unless a multiple seat license has been negotiated at time of purchase from GPSoftware. Where the software is executed from a common disk shared by multiple CPU's, the same limitations apply - you must ensure that one authorized copy of the software has been licensed from GPSoftware or authorized agent or resellers for each USER / CPU executing the software.

b) Depending on the exact nature of the license purchased, this license may grant you rights to technical support, bug fixes and rights to updates and enhancements to the software for the duration of this license.

c) You may not redistribute this software and/or accompanying serial number to any person or organization without the prior written consent of GPSoftware.

YOU MAY NOT USE, COPY, OR TRANSFER THE PROGRAM OR MANUAL, OR A COPY, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED. IF YOU TRANSFER POSSESSION OF ANY COPY OF THE PROGRAM TO ANOTHER PARTY, YOUR LICENCE IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED.

Limited Term Evaluation License

If you are using an evaluation version you may trial the program for a period of 30 days only. After this time you must either purchase a valid license, or cease using the software and uninstall any and all copies of the software and any related material from your computer.

Termination

This license is effective unless terminated. This license may be terminated immediately without notice from GPSoftware if you fail to comply with any provision of this license. Upon termination you must destroy the software and any and all associated materials and all copies thereof. The licensee may terminate the license at any time by destroying the software and all copies thereof.

Copyrights, Trademarks and Acknowledgments.

Directory Opus 8 for Windows and this manual are copyright © GPSoftware, Brisbane, 2001-2005. All rights reserved. The software was written by Jonathan Potter and Dr Greg Perry. Trevor Morris produced most of the icons and images. The manual and associated help files were written by Dr Greg Perry and Jonathan Potter.

Jon and I extend our thanks to the many people who have encouraged and provided assistance in the development and extensive Beta testing of this package. Our very special thanks go to the dedicated work put in by the early beta testing team of Leo ‘Nudel’ Davidson, Trevor Morris, Gus ‘Biggus’ Wrethman, Steve Banham, David Apelt, Wayne Howard, Pascal Peng and many others.

Opus ® and Directory Opus® are registered trademarks of GPSoftware / Redbrook Pty Ltd. DOpus ™, DirOpus™ and Opus File Manager™ are trademarked 1991 by GPSoftware; Opus Magellan ™ is trademarked 1996 GPSoftware; Opus6™, OpusPC™, PCOpus™, SmartFavorites™ are trademarked 1998 by GPSoftware. FlatView™ is trademarked by GPSoftware 2003.

Microsoft ® Windows, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows XP and other related terms are Copyright © or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp.

Amiga and AmigaDOS are trademarks of Amiga Inc.

Directory Opus makes use of several third party libraries; acknowledgement is hereby given for these.

•	zlib: (c) 1995-1998 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler

•	jpeg: This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

•	libpng: Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger, Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.

•	libtiff: Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler, Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.

•	xpdf:Copyright © 2001 Derek B. Noonburg. xpdf is used by the pdftext.dll Viewer plug-in. Since xpdf was released under the GNU GPL, the pdftext.dll Viewer plug-in is also available under GPL. See http://www.gpsoft.com.au/pdf-text.htm for more information

•	Brainchild version 2.0 (C) Copyright 1993-2002 by Jan van den Baard All Rights Reserved and included with permission from the author as of August 2003.

Opus ZIP handling makes use of DynaZip Library licensed from Innermedia, Inc.

Other products mentioned in this manual are trademarks or copyright of their respective owners.

Imitators beware!

Jonathan Potter originally developed the Directory Opus file manager in the 1980’s for the Amiga computer and it has been under continuous development since that time. A partnership was formed between Jonathan Potter and Dr Greg Perry of GPSoftware to carry on this development in 1993. We have noted with some disquiet that software clones for Windows and Linux has been published in recent years which have apparently stolen many of our concepts and intellectual property developed in earlier versions of Directory Opus. Some have even had the audacity to use our trademarked names, copyrighted logos and ideas in the product names and related material in order to pass themselves off as products related to Directory Opus. This is illegal and an infringement of our intellectual property rights. Directory Opus  is the only genuine product developed for Windows by Jonathan Potter and GPSoftware and we will take action against anyone attempting to pass off software which infringes upon our trademarks or the intellectual property of Directory Opus.

Dr Greg Perry, GPSoftware, PO Box 570, Ashgrove, Brisbane, Australia 4060Phone/Fax +61 7 33661402Email: greg@gpsoft.com.au  URL: http://www.gpsoft.com.au

ACN 010 794 359 All Rights Reserved.


Technical Support

Technical support, bug fix releases and discounts on future upgrades are available only to registered users.

Please contact your dealer or the local GPSoftware distributor in your local country for Technical Support in the first instance

You must quote your registration code and related details to be eligible for technical support. The level of technical support available to you will depend on the plan for which you qualify or the support package you have purchased and may vary from country to country depending on local distributors.

GPSoftware provides direct technical support by email for registered users and a subscriber mailing list for general discussion and technical issues related to Directory Opus. For further details please see our web site at http://www.gpsoft.com.au. On the Support page are self-service links for you to obtain help on common problems, plus an FAQ of current resolutions and topical issues.

Note that at the discretion of GPSoftware, any and all warranty or technical support is available only to the original purchaser of this package.


System Requirements

Directory Opus is designed to run on Windows 95/98/ME, Windows NT4 and Windows 2000, Windows XP and above. It requires at least Internet Explorer 4.0 to be installed in order to run. Don't worry - you don't need to use IE as your web browser if you don't want to! It just needs to have been installed on your system.

Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, XP and later all have IE 4.0 or later factory-installed, so if you are using those versions of Windows you don't need to be concerned about this at all.

If you are using Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.01 you will need to make sure you have at least IE 4.01 installed. If you are using Windows NT 4.01 you will also need to have at least Service Pack 3 installed. You can download the latest version of Internet Explorer from http://www.microsoft.com/ie. We recommend that you upgrade your version of Internet Explorer to the latest one available to take advantage of some of the newer Windows features.

You can download the latest version of Internet Explorer from http://www.microsoft.com/ie. We recommend that you upgrade your version of Internet Explorer to the latest one available to take advantage of some of the newer Windows features.


Installing and Serializing Directory Opus 8

Install Opus by double-clicking the supplied install program either from the CD or from the downloaded archive. We recommend that you select the default options for each section. Once the installer has done its job, run the program from the Start Menu or by double-clicking on the Opus 8 icon which appears on your Desktop.

Depending on how you purchased the product, you may have been supplied with a personal serial number or both a registration code and serial number or an encrypted program certificate. Before you can use your new Directory Opus 8 program, it must be personalized with this serial number or program certificate. When prompted, enter the required details in the Licence Manager Wizard and any other details as requested in the dialog. Follow the Wizard to complete the registration and Opus 8 will be ready for use.

•	Purchased Online: If you have purchased the product via our web site or an online store, a receipt and registration certificate will have been sent by e-mail to your nominated address. You will need the certificate to register the program.

•	Purchased a Boxed Product: In the program package you will find a registration card with registration details. You will need these details to complete the full program registration and obtain a valid program certificate. During the serialization procedure you will be issued a new personal registration certificate which will be required if you need to reinstall the program. We suggest you store this in a safe place for later reference

•	Trial Evaluation: If you have not purchased the product yet, you may obtain ONE 30-day trial evaluation certificate. When this expires you have a further 30-day period of grace after which you must either purchase the product, or cease using the program and uninstall it completely from your computer.

Please safeguard your personal registration certificate. It is unique to you. If you need to re-install Directory Opus 8, you will need to register the program again with this certificate. You also need to quote your registration code and related details to be eligible for technical support and upgrades, depending on the plan for which you qualify or have purchased. Technical support, bug fix releases and discounts on future upgrades are only available to registered users.


Launching Opus for the First Time

After completing the registration process, when you run Directory Opus for the first time you are presented with a Wizard which sets up some of the basic functionality of the program. We recommend that you accept the default settings.

Don’t worry! Use the default settings to start with until you understand how Directory Opus works. Afterwards, you can easily change these and other default choices from Preferences.

By default, Directory Opus is set to Run Opus on Startup. This starts Directory Opus when you boot the machine. Opus can be made to run in minimal mode and quietly just add the Opus light bulb icon to the system Tray to be waiting there for you when you need it. Alternatively, Opus can be told to optionally open the introductory Splash Screen, a Lister or layouts on startup. Once Opus is running you can easily open a Lister (or layout) from the tray icon, by a simple double-click on the Desktop, or any of the variety of methods discussed below.

Also by default, Directory Opus is installed as a Windows Explorer replacement with various context menus and double-click hooks for the Desktop installed. Directory Opus is also set as the default picture viewer for images and default sound player for WAV and other sound files.

Directory Opus has the ability to automatically check the GP Software web site to see if there is a new version available. When you run Opus for the first time it will perform this check in the background if you have an internet connection established. You can disable this behavior or change the frequency of automatic checks from Preferences.


Welcome to Directory Opus

Directory Opus 8 for Windows is a program unique amongst file managers, unlike anything seen before on the Windows platform. We have combined the knowledge gained from more than twenty five person years experience in the development of file managers with the latest design concepts to provide more power in one package than ever before. By using a strict object-oriented design methodology to harness the often hidden multi-tasking power of the Windows Operating System, we are proud to be able to bring you a totally new program concept, which is much smarter in the way it delivers this new power and flexibility to you the user.

You can take immediate advantage of this. File management, integrated ZIP handling and FTP transfers, viewing images and performing all those previously difficult to handle file operations under Windows have never been easier!

Out-of-the-box Directory Opus is very easy to use. It supports all the traditional standard functionality as you have been used to in Windows Explorer and other file management programs. Drag and Drop, Cut and Paste and such actions all function as you expect. Further, the sample toolbars and buttons provided give you an even more powerful way of performing actions in a simpler manner.  Each button has context

Unlike any other programs however, with Directory Opus you are not just limited to what the programmer wants you to do. From the extensive Preferences settings you can tailor and adjust the program’s performance to work they way you want!

Once you have mastered the basics, the unique design of Directory Opus will allow you to readily expand your abilities by taking advantage of the program’s powerful underlying architecture. You will be able to easily customize the program to combine your desired look and feel with the specific functionality you need. From Customize, you can modify all the toolbars, menus, buttons, hotkeys, context menus and much more. It is easy to add new toolbars and take advantage of the extremely powerful command set on which Opus is build

Help

Directory Opus provides extensive built-in help. Each toolbar button has popup ToolTip help explaining the functionality and the context-sensitive help in Preferences, Customize and other dialogs give you a quick summary of the specific item. Simply click the ‘?’ in the window title then click the item of interest. For mode details of specific features and functions, see the comprehensive manual supplied with the program in PDF format in the program’s home folder.

Explorer Replacement

Directory Opus can be set as the default handler for all folders. This means that when you double-click on a folder, it will open in Opus and not in Windows Explorer. This is known as Explorer Replacement Mode.

When used as an Explorer replacement, Opus 8 greatly enhances your productivity since there is no longer any need to keep swapping between programs to perform everyday tasks nor to have to run a new copy of Explorer just to copy files between folders. Opus 8 provides a seamless integration of file manager and Explorer functions and handles ZIP archives and FTP file transfer in the one program.

See Also

• Predefined Commands	• Opus Raw Commands
• Pattern Matching Syntax	• Regular Expression Syntax
• Predefined File Types	• Sample Hot Keys
• External Control Codes	• Status Bar Control Codes
• Raw Command Reference Tables

* This Help file is a reduced version of the Directory Opus 8 Manual supplied in PDF format as part of the program package. The manual contains only details of commands related items. For full details of how to use the program and main program features please consult the PDF Manual.


Predefined Commands

Directory Opus has two different command sets, the Raw Command set and the Predefined Command set. The Opus Raw Commands, described fully in a later section of this manual, are the actual commands that Directory Opus understands, and most accept one or more arguments that are used to modify their behavior to accomplish the desired function.

The predefined command set can be thought of as pseudo-commands, commands that are a simple alias to a more complex function built from the raw command set. The predefined commands are those that are displayed in the Customize window, and can be added to Toolbars and menus using drag and drop.

When you drag and drop a command from Customize to a Toolbar to create a new button, the function of the new button is actually set to the underlying raw command, with the appropriate parameters automatically defined. Most of the time you do not need to know anything about the raw command set – the predefined command set provides commands to access almost all of the functionality of Directory Opus.

There are two main types of Directory Opus commands – action and dynamic:

•	Action commands are those commands that actually do something – copy or delete a file, create a new folder, etc.

•	Dynamic commands, by contrast, are used to add dynamically generated action commands to Toolbars or menus. An example of a dynamic command is the Drive Buttons command described below. When you add a Drive Buttons command to a Toolbar, it is replaced dynamically with a set of buttons corresponding to the disk drives in your system. You can then click on one of the dynamically added buttons to actually read the contents of that disk into the current Lister. You can think of dynamic commands as placeholders – they are never used directly, but instead mark the place in a Toolbar where action commands will appear when the program is in use.

For example, [image] in Customize mode may turn into [image] in normal use.

The predefined commands are grouped in the Customize window into several categories, intended to make it easier to find the particular command you want. When a predefined command is listed below, the equivalent raw command and arguments are also shown following the command name in color.


All Commands

The All Commands category is not a category in itself; rather it gives you a single list of all the predefined commands from which to choose from. If you know the name of a predefined command but can’t remember which category it appears in, you can find it in the All Commands list in alphabetical order.


Default Menus

The Default Menus category lets you access the Directory Opus default menus and Toolbars. For example, if you had modified your default Lister menu and wanted to restore the default File menu while leaving all other menus as they are, you can drag the Default File Menu command from this category and drop it into a Toolbar.


Edit

The Edit category provides commands that normally appear in the Edit menu of Directory Opus. This includes commands having to do with clipboard functionality (Copy, Cut, Paste), file selection (Select All, etc) and the undo commands.

•	Copy	Clipboard COPY

This command copies all currently selected files and folders in the active Lister to the clipboard. The files on the clipboard can then be pasted into another folder using the Paste command.

•	Cut	Clipboard CUT

This command is similar to the Copy command, except that when the files are pasted into another folder, the original files are deleted. That is, this command in conjunction with Paste performs a Move rather than a Copy. Note that when you Cut files, the files are not actually deleted until they are pasted into a new location.

•	Paste	Clipboard PASTE

This command pastes files and folders that are currently on the clipboard into the active Lister. If the files that are on the clipboard were put there by a Cut command rather than a Copy command, the original files will be deleted.

If the clipboard does not contain files but instead contains an image, the Paste command will write that image to the active Lister as a file called Clipboard Image.bmp. Similarly, text on the clipboard will be written to a text file called Clipboard Text.txt.

•	Paste Shortcut 	Clipboard PASTESHORTCUT

This command pastes shortcuts to the files that are on the clipboard into the active Lister. Shortcuts are small files that refer to the original files – the original files themselves are not moved or copied by this function.

•	Read Only	Set READONLY=Toggle

This command is used within ZIP files to toggle the ‘read-only’ status for that ZIP file. This is not the same as the ‘read-only’ file attribute – it is an internal flag that Directory Opus maintains. When a ZIP file is set internally as read-only, it can not be modified from within Directory Opus. You can use the Open ZIP files as read-only by default flag in Preferences to cause all ZIP files to be set to ‘read-only’ when they are first accessed.

•	Reselect	Select RESELECT

This command reselects all files and folders in the active Lister which were unselected by the operation of the previous command. For example, if you select five files in the current Lister and copy them somewhere, the files will no longer be selected. Selecting the Reselect command would cause them to be reselected.

•	Select Advanced	Select ADVANCED

This command opens the Advanced Selection dialog. Directory Opus has two ‘wildcard’-based selection modes. The simple mode allows you to type a single wildcard pattern (or regular expression) to select files in the active Lister by filename. The advanced mode offers a full expression-based command system for file selection, supporting selection by file contents and attributes as well as by filename.

•	Select All	Select ALL

This command simply selects all files and folders in the active Lister.

•	Select Field

This command adds a text entry field (with drop-down history list) to a Toolbar that lets you enter a wildcard pattern to immediately select files and folders in the current Lister. It is equivalent to using the Select Wild command without displaying the file selection dialog.

•	Select Invert	Select INVERT

This command inverts the selection of all files and folders in the active Lister. That is, files that are currently selected are unselected, and vice versa.

•	Select None	Select NONE

This command deselects all files and folders in the active Lister.

•	Select Wild 	Select

This command opens the file selection dialog. The dialog has two modes, simple and advanced, and when you use this command to open it, it is opened in the mode it was last used in.

•	Undo	Undo

This command attempts to undo the last action that you performed. Directory Opus remembers the last ten actions that you perform that are undoable. When you undo an action, it is removed from the ‘undo list’, and so the next time you invoke the undo command the second-last undo command will be undone.

Most basic file commands can be undone; for example, Copy, Create Folder, Rename, etc. The effects of the Delete command can also be undone provided the files were deleted to the Windows Recycle Bin. There is an option in the File Operations section of Preferences to enable the use of the Recycle Bin.

•	Undo List	Undo LIST

This is a dynamic command that adds a list of all currently undoable actions to the Toolbar or menu. You can select one of the dynamically added items to undo a specific item in the undo list.

•	Undo Menu 	Undo LISTMENU

This is the same as the Undo List command, except that the list of undoable actions is shown in a popup submenu rather than in the Toolbar or menu itself.

•	Undo Page	Undo PAGE

This command opens the Output Window to display the Undo page, where you can see the list of all currently undoable actions and selectively undo them (or undo them all!)


File

The File category provides commands that normally appear in the File menu of Directory Opus.

•	Close Lister 	Close

This command closes the active Lister. Directory Opus itself is left running.

•	Exit 	Close  PROGRAM

This command exits Directory Opus. All open Listers and other windows are automatically closed when you select the Exit command.

•	Find	Find

This command opens the Find function which can be used to search for files and folders by name, contents and attributes. The Find function is described in greater detail in Chapter 10.

•	Open New Lister	Go NEW

This command opens a brand new Lister. The folder initially shown in the Lister depends on the settings in the Lister Defaults section of Preferences. The new Lister is opened immediately under the mouse pointer for easy access.

•	Set As Destination	Set STATE=Source

This command sets the active Lister into source mode. This means that it will act as the source for any file commands involving two Listers (e.g. Copy or Move). A Lister is also set to source mode automatically when you click on any file or folder, or on the status bar at the bottom of the window.

•	Set As Source 	Set STATE=Dest

This command sets the active Lister into destination mode. This means it will act as the destination for any file commands involving two Listers (e.g. Copy or Move).


File Commands

The File Commands are the workhorse of Directory Opus. They are commands that operate directly on the files or folders, letting you copy, move, delete or rename them. They are what make Directory Opus a file manager. Most file commands act within the context of the currently active source Lister and on the selected files or folders within that Lister. Some commands, like Copy or Move require both a source and a destination Lister. If there is no destination Lister available when you select one of these commands, you will be prompted to select the destination folder for the function.

•	Add To ZIP	Copy ADDTOZIP

This command lets you add all selected files and folders to a new or existing ZIP file. It displays the Add to ZIP dialog box letting you choose a ZIP file to add the selected files to, and set compression/password parameters. It is equivalent to the Add to ZIP… file context menu comment.

•	Copy As	Copy As

This command copies all selected files and folders in the active Lister to the destination. The difference between this command and the Copy File command is that Copy As lets you give new names to the copied files automatically. During the copy process, you will be prompted to enter a new name for each file or folder that is copied.

You will notice that there are two text fields in the Copy As dialog. The top field shows the original name of the file and the bottom field is where you can enter a new filename. However, you can also use this function to perform batch renames of the copied files, by entering an asterisk to replace a section of the name.

This would cause all copied files that end in .jpg to be automatically renamed to end with –picture.jpg. For example, a file called dh2-panorama.jpg would be copied as dh2-panorama-picture.jpg.

•	Copy File	Copy

This command copies all selected files and folders in the source Lister to the destination. If any folders are selected to be copied, the setting of the Copy Filter will determine which files are copied. By default, the attributes and timestamps of files are preserved when they are copied – you can override this behavior from the File Operations section of Preferences.

Directory Opus has special handling when you are trying to copy over existing DLL, EXE or OCX files that are locked or in use by another process. In this instance, Opus will detect that the file is in use and will offer to defer the copy process until the system is restarted. If you choose to do this Opus copies the file to a temporary folder, and then next time you restart the system the file will be automatically copied to its intended destination. You can view and cancel deferred file copies (before restarting) through the Undo system.

Directory Opus supports the Windows XP CD burning system. When you attempt to copy a file to a writeable CD, Opus copies the file to the CD burning staging folder automatically. If you do not wish to use the Windows XP CD burning system, you can turn off this support from the Reading Folders section of Preferences.

•	Create Folder 	CreateFolder

This command lets you create a new folder in the current Lister. You can enter multiple path levels separated by \ to create sub-folders automatically. If you select the Read new folder automatically option, Directory Opus will automatically read the newly created folder into the current Lister.

•	Delete	Delete

This command deletes all selected files and folders in the active Lister. If you have the Delete using Windows Recycle Bin option turned on in the File Operations section of Preferences, the files will be moved to the Recycle Bin instead of being permanently deleted. Files that have been moved to the Recycle Bin can be recovered later using the Undo function or by manually browsing to the Recycle Bin.

Note that even with the Recycle Bin option turned on, files can not always be recycled successfully. For example, files on network drives or removable media like floppy disks can not be moved to the Recycle Bin. In this case, you will be warned that the files are going to be permanently deleted.

If any folders are selected to be deleted, the setting of the Delete Filter will determine which files are deleted.

•	Duplicate	Copy DUPLICATE

This command is similar to the Copy As command, except that the selected files are copied back to the source folder rather than to a different destination folder.

•	Email Files	Copy SENDMAIL

This command opens your default email client and sends all selected files as an attachment to a new email message. This command is subject to the Use MAPI setting in the Miscellaneous / Internet Settings section of Preferences.

•	Extract	Copy EXTRACT

This command is similar to the Copy command, except it is only designed for use with folders or ZIP files. It copies the contents of the selected folder or ZIP file to be copied to the destination folder, rather than the folder or ZIP file itself.

For example, say you have a ZIP file called test.zip containing a file called My Document.txt. If you select the test.zip file and run the Extract command on it, the file My Document.txt will be extracted from it and copied to the destination folder. This function provides a quick way to extract the contents of a ZIP file or folder without having to enter it and copy the contents out manually.

•	Get Sizes	GetSizes

Ordinarily, only files have a size displayed in the Lister. This command operates on all selected folders in the active Lister, and makes Directory Opus calculate their size. The size that is displayed is the total size of all files within each folder, and is not necessarily representative of the amount of disk space used by the folder. If a folder contains no files at all, its size will be shown as empty.

If a folder already has a size displayed for it (if you have automatic sizing turned on in the Lister Settings section of Preferences), you can use the Get Sizes command to recalculate the size manually.

•	Join	Join

The Join command lets you join together multiple files into one big file. It is mainly used when you have a file that has been split into multiple parts (i.e. for transmission via email) and you wish to recombine the parts.

When you run the Join command, all selected files in the active Lister are automatically added to the list of files to join. However, you can add more files to this list using the Add button in the Join dialog, or drag and drop files from another Lister to the Join window. You can also use drag and drop or the Move buttons to change the order of files within the join list. You also need to specify the name of the output file (the joined file).

Often files that have been split have also been uuencoded for reliable transmission via email systems. If the files you are recombining have been encoded in this way, select the UUDecode option to automatically decode the joined file.

•	Move As	Copy MOVE AS

The Move As command works like the Copy As command, except that the files and folders are moved instead of copied. This means that after the files are copied to the destination, the original files are deleted.

•	Move File	Copy MOVE

This command is similar to the Copy File command, except that selected files and folders are moved instead of copied.

•	New ZIP Folder	CreateFolder ZIP

This command lets you create a new ZIP file. ZIP files are similar to folders in many ways except their contents are compressed, meaning they often take up much less space than normal folders. They are especially useful for sending multiple files via email.

•	Play	Play

This command uses the built-in sound player to play all selected sound files in the active Lister. The built-in sound player is a simple utility designed to play a sound without the possible overhead of loading an external player. It supports the WAV format as well as any other sound files for which there is a system codec installed.

The Play window displays some basic information on the sound currently being played, and has four controls which, from left to right, are Restart, Stop, Play and a slider which lets you select the position within the file to begin playing from. The Close Play window when finished option causes the Play window to be automatically closed when the sound finishes playing. If you turn this option off, the Play window will remain open after the sound finishes allowing you to play the sound again if you desire.

•	Print	Print

This command prints all selected files to the printer that you select. Directory Opus can natively print only the picture formats that it understands (JPEG, GIF, ILBM, etc). However, using system-defined print handlers it can print many other types of file. For example, when you select a text file and choose the Print command, the system-defined print handler, which is set by default to Notepad, is automatically invoked to print the selected file.

Under Windows XP, the Print command invokes the system Photo Printing Wizard when you select recognized image files to print. The Wizard is also invoked when you select Print with no files selected.

•	Properties	Properties

This command displays the standard system Properties dialog for all selected files and folders. It is the equivalent of right clicking on a file and choosing Properties from the context menu.

•	Rename	Rename

This command allows you to change the names of all selected files and folders. You can rename files one by one, or use wildcards to perform a batch rename.

The batch rename is similar in functionality to the wildcard rename used in the Copy As and Move As functions, however it also offers the use of find and replace, case modification, regular expressions and a special test mode.

Case modification lets you automatically modify the capitalization of selected files. You can choose from All Upper-case, All Lower-case, Capitalize First Word, Capitalize All Words, Upper-case Extension and Lower-case Extension.

If you have Regular expressions turned off, you can still use a single asterisk wildcard to batch rename files as described above for the Copy As command. Alternatively, you can activate the Find and replace mode. With this option turned on, the Rename function acts like a Find & Replace function in a word processor. Enter the text within the filename that you wish to search for in the old name field, and the text you wish to replace it with in the new name field. Any files whose filenames do not contain the text you enter will not be modified.

With the regular expression option turned on, you can use full regular expression syntax (see the Appendix) to completely control the rename process. The Rename dialog has a drop-down history list of your past regular expression renames.

The Automatically rename if new filename exists flag can be used in conjunction with batch rename to automatically avoid clashes with existing files. Files to be renamed automatically have a number appended to the new name if a file by that name already exists.

The Test mode option lets you test whether a wildcard or regular expression rename would produce the desired results. With this option turned on, no files are actually renamed. Rather, the results of the command are displayed in the Test page of the Opus Output Window, letting you see the effect of the command before actually performing the rename.

If the results are as you desired you can then turn off the Test mode option and perform the rename for real. Or, you can revise the old and new name parameters and test the rename again with new settings.

The Rename files in selected sub-folders lets you automatically rename all files in selected sub-folders. This only makes sense with a case modification, wildcard or regular expression rename. We suggest you use the Test mode to verify the results of the rename before using this option.

•	Remove From Collection	Delete REMOVECOLLECTION

This command removes all selected files from the currently displayed File Collection. If you use the normal Delete command in a File Collection, the real files will be deleted. Use the Remove From Collection command to remove the selected files from the collection without deleting the actual files themselves. This command is assigned to the right-button function of the Delete button on the default toolbar.

•	Secure Wipe	Delete SECURE

This function invokes the Secure Wipe feature of Directory Opus 8. This uses algorithms similar to those recommended by the US NSA and US Department of Defense for securely destroying the contents of a file to make recovery by forensic analysis of the magnetic medium of the disk extremely difficult if not unlikely. The number of passes for each file can be configured in Preferences. This command is assigned to the middle-button function of the Delete button on the default toolbar.

•	Set Attributes	SetAttr

The Set Attributes command lets you modify the attributes and timestamps of all selected files and folders. The attributes you can modify are Read Only (file can not be deleted or modified), Archive (file is marked for backup), Hidden (file is not normally displayed) and System (file is a system file). You can also set the creation and last modified time to a specific date and time.

If you turn on the Make the same changes to files within selected folders option, all files within selected folders will also be modified. This operation is recursive. You can also use an optional filter to control which files are modified – without a filter, all files are changed by default.

•	Set Description	SetAttr DESCRIPTION

You can use this command to enter your own descriptions for files and folders. Because Windows does not support user-entered descriptions for files, Directory Opus records this information in its own hidden data file. The descriptions you enter are displayed in the Description column in Listers.

•	Shortcut	Copy MAKESHORTCUT

This command makes shortcuts in the destination folder of all selected files and folders in the source Lister. Shortcuts are small files that refer to the original files – the original files themselves are not copied by this function.

•	Show	Show

This command uses the built-in viewer to display all selected files in the active Lister. The built-in viewer is designed to let you view various types of files including images, text and other file formats as supported by the optional Viewer plug-in system. It allows you to view files quickly without the possible overhead of loading an external viewer or editor. Directory Opus natively supports most common graphics formats including JPEG, GIF, TIF, PNG, ILBM, PSD, Windows Bitmap, WMF and EMF as well as the Amiga Icon format (.info).

•	Split	Split

This command is the companion to the Join command, and lets you split a single file into multiple, smaller parts. It also allows you to uuencode the split files for transmission via email. Split operates on the first selected file in the active Lister. You need to specify the output folder for the split files, as well as the chunk size. You can select from one of the predefined chunk sizes or enter your own chunk size in bytes. The split files automatically have a numerical prefix appended indicating their order.

•	Update All	Copy UPDATEALL

This function is used to update files, for example from your local computer to a network drive or FTP site. It operates on all selected files in the active Lister, however the only files that will actually be copied to the destination folder are those files that:

•	do not exist already in the destination, or

•	do exist in the destination but are different from the files in the source

Files that do not meet either of these two criteria are not copied. This is a useful way, for example, to update your web site on a remote FTP server without transferring files unnecessarily.

A file is defined as being different if its timestamp or size has changed – the contents of the file itself are not compared.

Note that you must select all files that you wish to update in the source Lister before running this command.

•	Update Existing	Copy UPDATEEXISTING

This function is very similar to the Update All command, except that files in the destination folder are only updated if they already exist and are different to the source files. Files that do not already exist in the destination are not copied.

•	ZIP and Email Files	Copy SENDMAIL ADDTOZIP

This command combines the Add to ZIP and the Email Files in one. It displays the Add to ZIP dialog box that lets you enter a filename to ZIP all selected files, and then sends the resulting ZIP file as an attachment to a new email message using your default email client.


Go

The Go commands are commands to do with the current folder displayed in a Lister. They let you change between folders, move to a specific folder or the parent of the current folder, and access the History, Recent and Favorites lists.

•	Connect Network Drive	Go CONNECT

This command displays the system dialog that allows you to (dis) connect to, or (un) Map, a network drive to a drive letter.

•	Disconnect Network Drive	Go DISCONNECT

This command displays the system dialog that allows you to disconnect from a network drive.

•	Drive Buttons	Go DRIVEBUTTONS

This is a dynamic command which adds buttons to a Toolbar, corresponding to the disk drives you have in your system. You can then click on these buttons to read those disks into the active Lister.

•	Favorites Add	Favorites ADD

This command adds the folder currently displayed in the active Lister to the Favorites list.

•	Favorites Edit	Favorites EDIT

This command opens the Preferences editor and displays the Favorites List automatically.

•	Favorites List	Favorites

This is a dynamic command that generates a list of your favorite folders. The Favorites list can be edited in the Favorites List in Preferences.

•	Favorites Menu	Favorites

This command is the same as the Favorites List command above except that the Favorites list is displayed in a popup submenu rather than in the Toolbar or menu itself.

•	Favorites Menu (Dual Display)	Set DUAL=Toggle
Favorites OPENINDUAL
Favorites OPENINDUAL SMART

This command defines a menu button - a button that acts like a normal button when clicked, but also has an arrow which, when clicked, opens a drop-down menu.

Clicking the button itself will toggle the active Lister between single- and dual-file display modes. If you click the arrow portion of the button, a drop-down menu will appear which displays your Favorites list, followed by any Smart Favorites. Selecting an item from the Favorites list will set the Lister into dual-file display mode (if it is not in this mode already), and then open the folder in the opposite file display.

•	Favorites Smart	Favorites SMART

This is a dynamic command that generates a list of your Smart Favorites.

•	Favorites Smart Menu	Favorites SMART

This command is the same as Favorites Smart except that the Smart Favorites list is displayed in a popup submenu rather than in the Toolbar or menu itself.

•	FTP Quick Connect	Go FTP

This command opens the FTP Quick Connect window, which lets you connect to an arbitrary FTP site and specify login details without having to first enter the FTP site in the Address Book.

The recall button (blue arrow) to the right of the FTP host field lets you quickly retrieve the details of the last FTP site you connected to.

•	FTP Site List	Go FTPSITELIST

This is a dynamic command that generates a list of your defined FTP sites. The FTP Address Book can be edited via Preferences.

•	FTP Site Menu	Go FTPSITELIST

This command is the same as the FTP Site List command except that the FTP site list is displayed in a popup submenu rather than in the Toolbar or menu itself.

•	Go Back	Go BACK

As you move around folders in a Lister, Directory Opus keeps a list of where you have been (the History List). This is different from the Recent List, because it is maintained on a per-Lister basis rather than globally for the whole system.

The Go Back command lets you quickly move back to the previously visited folder. As well as remembering the folders you have visited, Directory Opus also remembers which files and folders were selected, so that when you move back to a previous folder, the selection state is automatically restored.

•	Go Back (Drop-down List)	Go BACK
 	Go BACKLIST

This command defines a menu button that gives you the Go Back function on the button itself, and a dynamically generated list of previously visited folders on the drop-down menu portion of the button.

If you click the button itself, you will move back to the previous folder in the History List. If you select a folder from the drop-down list, you will move directly to that folder without having to traverse all the history items in between.

•	Go Forward	Go FORWARD

Similar to the Go Back command, this command lets you move to the next folder in the History List.

•	Go Forward (Drop-down List) 	Go FORWARD
 	Go FORWARDLIST

This is similar to the Go Back (Drop-down List) command except that it moves to the next folder in the History List rather than the previous one. The dynamically generated list is of all folders in the History List that come after the current folder instead of before.

•	Go To File Collections	Go coll://

This command goes to the File Collections root folder. This folder lists all your File Collections, which you can then browse by double-clicking. You can also create and delete File Collections from here. This command appears in the default Go menu.

•	Go To My Computer	Go /mycomputer

This command takes you to the My Computer folder in the system namespace.

•	Go To My Documents Folder 	Go /mydocuments

This command takes you quickly to your My Documents folder.

•	Go To Network Neighborhood	Go /network

This command quickly takes you to the Network Neighborhood folder in the system namespace (note that under Windows 2000 this folder is known as My Network Places).

•	Go To Root	Go ROOT

This command takes you to the root of the current folder. This command is only applicable if the current folder displayed in the Lister is a filesystem folder. For example, the root of C:\Program Files\GPSoftware\Directory Opus is C:\

•	Go To The Desktop	Go /desktop

This command takes you to the Desktop folder.

•	Go To The Recycle Bin	Go /trash

This command quickly takes you to the system Recycle Bin folder.

•	Go To The Start Menu	Go /start

This command takes you to the folder used to store the Start Menu. It is the equivalent of selecting the Advanced option from the Start Menu Programs tab of the system Taskbar Properties dialog.

•	Go To The Startup Folder	Go /startup

This command takes you to the folder (usually a subfolder of the Start Menu) used to store shortcuts for programs automatically run on system startup.

•	Go Up	Go UP

This command takes you to the parent of the currently displayed folder in the active Lister.

•	Path Field

This is a dynamic command that adds a path field control to the Toolbar in which you place it. A path field is a text entry field that lets you enter a path manually. When you enter a path and press the enter key, the Lister will change to display that path.

•	Path Field (Favorites List)

This is similar to the Path Field command, except that the path field added also has a drop-down Favorites List attached to it. This contains a list of your defined Favorite folders.

•	Path Field (Folder Tree)

This is similar to the Path Field command, except that the path field has a drop-down Folder Tree attached to it. This is a cut-down Folder Tree, which shows only the top couple of levels of the system namespace, and the path leading to the current folder. It enables you to quickly see where in the file system you are and to move back to parent folders easily.

•	Path Field (Recent List)

This is similar to the Path Field command, except that the path field also has a drop-down Recent List attached to it. This contains a list of your recently visited folders (this list is maintained globally and is not Lister-specific).

•	Recent List	Recent

This is a dynamic command that generates a list of your recently visited folders. This list is maintained globally and is not specific to the current Lister. You can enable or disable the Recent List functionality and configure the maximum size of the list from the Recent List section in Preferences.

•	Recent List Clear	Recent CLEAR

This command clears the Recent List.

•	Recent Menu	Recent

This command is similar to the Recent List command except that the list of folders generated is displayed in a popup submenu instead of in the Toolbar or menu itself.

•	Swap Source/Destination	Go SWAP

This command swaps the current source and destination folders. If the current Lister is in dual display mode, the left and right file displays will be swapped. Otherwise, the folder in the current Lister will be swapped with the folder in the destination Lister.


Help

The Help commands usually appear in the Help menu of a Lister, and are used to display program information and to gain access to the online help system.

•	About	Help ABOUT

This command displays the Directory Opus About screen, which contains information about the current version of the program, copyright and contact details for technical support, as well as your registration details (or expiry date in case of an evaluation registration).

•	Contents	Help

This command accesses the online help system and displays the contents page.

•	Directory Opus Manual	HelpMANUAL

This command displays the Directory Opus manual from the PDF file in the Opus program directory.

•	Licence Manager	HelpLICENCEMANAGER

This command displays the Directory Opus Licence Manager, which displays details of your current Program Certificate and lets you install a new one if needed. This command appears in the default Help menu.


Miscellaneous

The Miscellaneous commands are commands that do not easily fit into any other category.

•	Change Default Printer	Print DEFAULTLIST

This is a dynamic command that generates buttons for each of your installed printers. Clicking on one of these buttons sets that printer as the default. You can also drag and drop files onto these buttons to print a file directly to a given printer.

•	CLI	Cli

This command opens the Directory Opus CLI (command-line interpreter) interface. This is a very simple keyboard interface to the Directory Opus command set. It lets you enter commands and have them run immediately without having to set up Toolbar buttons first. You will not normally need to use this function.

•	Command Field

This command adds a text entry field (with drop-down history list) to a Toolbar that lets you enter a command string (either an Opus internal command or the name of an external program) that is executed immediately. For example, you could enter a command like rename *.txt *.doc if you wanted to rename all .txt files in the current Lister to .doc files without going through the Rename dialog.

•	DOS Prompt Here	Cli DOSPROMPT

This command opens a DOS prompt window, with the current directory set to the source directory in the current Lister.

•	Marker – All Menus	Marker MENU=All

The Marker command is a dynamic command that lets Directory Opus display Toolbar buttons and menu items that are added dynamically by third-party namespace extensions. For example, an FTP namespace extension may add buttons to the Toolbar to switch between ASCII and Binary transfer modes.

Windows Explorer allows a third-party namespace extension to totally replace the Toolbar and menu contents. However, Directory Opus gives full control to the user over the state of the Toolbars, and therefore the Marker commands are necessary to gain access to these dynamically added functions.

The Marker command is a placeholder that tells Directory Opus where to insert the appropriate namespace-added functions.

The Marker – All Menus command marks the spot where all namespace-added menu items are to be displayed.

•	Marker – Edit Menu	Marker MENU=Edit

This command marks the spot where any items added to the standard Edit menu by the namespace are displayed.

•	Marker – File Context Menu	Filetype CONTEXTMENU

This command marks the spot where items defined by the system for the context menu of the selected files or folders are added.

•	Marker – File Menu	Marker MENU=File

This command marks the point where any items added by the namespace to the standard File menu are displayed.

•	Marker – Help Menu	Marker MENU=Help

This command marks the spot where items added to the standard Help menu by the namespace are displayed.

•	Marker – Lister Context Menu 	Filetype CONTEXTMENU=Directory\Background

This command marks the spot where items defined by the system for the context menu for the current folder are added.

•	Marker – Other Menu	Marker MENU =Other

This command marks the spot where menu items defined by the namespace that are not contained in any of the standard menus are displayed.

•	Marker – Toolbar	Marker TOOLBAR

This command identifies where buttons added by the namespace to the Toolbar are displayed (note that you can put a Toolbar marker in a menu and vice versa – in Directory Opus, menus and Toolbars are interchangeable).

•	Marker – Tools Menu	Marker MENU=Tools

This command marks the spot where menu items defined by a namespace extension for the standard Tools menu are to be displayed.

•	Marker – View Menu	Marker MENU=View

This command marks the point where menu items defined by a namespace extension for the standard View menu are to be displayed.

•	Print Folder	Print FOLDER

This command opens the Print Folder dialog which lets you print the contents of a folder to the printer or to a disk file.

The Print Folder dialog opens with the folder visible in the current Lister as the one selected to print, however you can use the Browse button to select a different folder. You can also choose to print the contents of sub-folders and (optionally) define a filter which controls which files are printed.

The Destination can be a printer, a disk-based file or the clipboard. The Format section lets you configure which information columns are printed and how wide they are. You can also choose the font to use.


New

The items available in the New category are not commands – instead, they let you create empty Toolbar buttons via drag and drop. You can then define the button commands yourself using the Command Editor. You can also create empty Toolbar buttons by right-clicking on the Toolbar in Customize mode and selecting the appropriate item from the New context menu.

•	New Button

This creates a brand new button, with no function defined. You need to fill out the function and set the name and (optionally) ToolTip (label) and icon settings for the button.

•	New Menu

This creates a brand new menu that you can add your own items to.

•	New Menu Button

This creates a new button which also has an arrow that opens a drop-down submenu. You can define the function for the button part and also add your own items to the submenu.


Settings

The Settings commands provide access to and control over to the Preferences settings. They let you access the Preferences, Customize and other user-configuration sections of Directory Opus.

•	Copy Filter	Set COPYFILTER=Toggle

This command lets you toggle the state of the Copy Filter. The state of this can also be set from the File Operations section in Preferences.

•	Customize	Prefs CUSTOMIZE

This command opens the Customize window and puts Directory Opus into Customize mode, allowing you to edit your Toolbars and menus.

•	Delete Filter	Set DELFILTER=Toggle

This command lets you toggle the state of the Delete Filter. The state of this can also be set from the File Operations section in Preferences.

•	Enable Sounds	Set SOUNDS=Toggle

This command lets you toggle Directory Opus sound effects on or off without having to go through the Sounds section in Preferences.

•	File Filter	Set FILTERS=Toggle

This command lets you toggle the states of both the Copy Filter and the Delete Filter Preferences options.

•	Filetypes	Prefs FILETYPES

This command opens the File Type Editor, which lets you see and modify the system file type associations.

•	FTP Add To Site List	Prefs ADDFTPSITE

This command adds the currently open FTP site to the FTP Address Book.

•	FTP ASCII Transfer Mode	Set FTPMODE=ASCII

This command sets the transfer mode for the current FTP connection to ASCII.

•	FTP Auto Transfer Mode	Set FTPMODE=AUTO

This command sets the transfer mode for the current FTP connection to Auto.

•	FTP Binary Transfer Mode	Set FTPMODE=Binary

This command sets the transfer mode for the current FTP connection to Binary.

•	FTP Edit Site List	Prefs  FTPSITES

This command opens the Preferences dialog and goes automatically to the FTP section.

•	Import/Export Settings	Prefs IMPORTEXPORT

This command allows you to access the Settings Export & Import function. This function lets you export your entire Directory Opus configuration, including Preferences settings, toolbars, menus, hotkeys, file types, images and sounds as a single file. This can then be re-imported later to totally restore your Directory Opus configuration. This command appears in the default Settings menu.

•	Lister Themes	Prefs THEMES

The Lister Themes command displays the Lister Themes dialog, which lets you load and save Lister Themes. This command appears in the default Settings menu.

•	Preferences	Prefs

This command opens the Preferences window, where most of the user-configurable options in Directory Opus can be found. Preferences opens to the last page used.

•	Save All Listers	Prefs LAYOUTSAVE

This command saves all currently open Listers as a new Lister Layout. Directory Opus will prompt you for the layout name to use. This command appears in the default Settings menu.

•	Saved Layouts – Edit	Prefs LAYOUTEDIT

This command opens the Preferences dialog and automatically takes you to the Lister Layouts section.

•	Saved Layouts – List	Prefs LAYOUTLIST

This is a dynamic command that generates a list of all saved Lister Layouts. This allows you to select the Layout you wish to load without having to go through Preferences.

•	Saved Layouts – Load	Prefs LAYOUT=<name>

This command lets you load a specific saved Lister Layout. If you add this command to a Toolbar you then need to edit the button and specify the actual name of the Layout to load.

•	Saved Layouts – Drop-Down	Prefs LAYOUTEDIT
 	Prefs LAYOUTLIST

This command adds a drop-down menu button. The button itself opens the Lister Layouts page in Preferences, letting you edit your saved Layouts. The drop-down menu displays a dynamically generated list of your current saved Lister Layouts; selecting a layout from this List automatically opens the Layout.

•	Saved Preferences List	Prefs IMPORTLIST

This is a dynamic command that generates a list of all exported Preferences files. This allows you to select the set of Preferences you wish to load without having to use the Load menu in  Preferences.

•	Saved Preferences Menu	Prefs IMPORTLIST

This is the same as the Saved Preferences List command except that the list of exported Preferences files is displayed in a popup submenu instead of in the Toolbar or menu itself.

•	Save Single Lister	Prefs LAYOUTSAVE=single

Similar to Save All Listers, this command saves only the currently active Lister as a new Lister Layout.

•	Toolbar List	Toolbar LIST

This is a dynamic command that generates a list of all defined Toolbars. You can turn Toolbars on or off by selecting one from this list.

•	Viewer Plugin List	Show PLUGINLIST

This is a dynamic command that generates a list of the currently installed Viewer Plug-ins, that lets you view the About information for each plug-in and, if supported by the plug-in, configure it as well.

•	VFS Plugin List	Prefs VFSPLUGINLIST

This command dynamically generates a list of your installed VFS Plugins, much the save as the Viewer Plugin List command. You can enable or disable the Plugins, as well as access the About and Configure functions from this list. This command appears in the default Settings menu.


Tools

The Tools category is new in Directory Opus 8. It contains several existing commands which have been moved here from other categories, as well as several new commands. The commands that have been moved from other categories are Change Default Printer, CLI, Command Field, DOS Prompt Here, Output Window and Print Folder. The new commands are as follows:

•	Convert Images	Image CONVERT

This command opens the Image Conversion dialog, which lets you convert all selected image files to either JPG, GIF, PNG or BMP format, as well as resize and rotate images. This command appears on the default Tools menu.

•	Duplicate Files	Set UTILITY=Dupe,Toggle

This command displays the Duplicate File Finder in the Utility Panel in the current Lister. This tool lets you search your hard drive for duplicate files that may be wasting unnecessary space. This command is a toggle; if the Duplicate Files page of the Utility Panel is already open, the Utility Panel will be closed. This command appears on the default Tools menu.

•	Duplicate Files Lister	Go CURRENT LAYOUT=dupefinder

As an alternative to displaying the Duplicate File Finder in the current Lister, this command opens a new Lister specifically configured to run the Duplicate File Finder function. The special predefined layout dupefinder is used for this purpose. If you hold the shift key down when closing the Duplicate Files Lister, any size and position changes you have made to the window will be automatically preserved.

•	Find Panel	Set UTILITY=Find,Toggle

This command displays the Find page of the Utility Panel in the current Lister. This is identical to the standalone Find Tool, except that it can only output the results of the find in a File Collection in the current Lister. This command is a toggle; if the Find page of the Utility Panel is already displayed, the Utility Panel will be closed. This command appears on the default Tools menu.

•	Synchronize	Set UTILITY=Sync,Toggle

This command displays the Synchronize tab of the Utility Panel in the current Lister. This lets you access the powerful File Synchronization system built into Directory Opus. This command is a toggle; if the Synchronize page of the Utility Panel is already displayed, the Utility Panel will be closed. This command appears on the default Tools menu.

•	Synchronize Lister	Go CURRENT DUALPATH={destpath} LAYOUT=synchronize

Similar to the Duplicate Files Lister command, this opens a special predefined Layout configured to run the File Synchronize function. The new Lister will inherit the current source and destination paths automatically. If you hold the shift key down when closing the Synchronize Lister, any size and position changes you have made to the window will be automatically preserved.


User

The User command category is initially empty. This category contains commands that you can define yourself. You can build a new command out of existing Directory Opus commands, using external programs, or a combination of both.

The advantage of this is that it lets you define a simple alias (command name) for what might be a very complicated command. You can then add this command to Toolbars or menus without having to recreate the details of the command.

Another use is to make future modifications to the command easy. For example, say you have created a User command to load a paint program to edit the currently selected file. If, later on, you want to change to using a new paint program, you only have to modify the definition of the User command. Any Toolbar buttons or menu items that use this command will automatically be updated to use the new command definition.

User-defined commands can have a command template similar to the Raw Command set. Use the Template field in the Command Editor to specify the template. Then, you need to insert special codes into the function definition to indicate where parameters from the command line are to be inserted.

For example, consider the following user-defined command:

Command:	Edit
Template:	NAME
Function:	Notepad &NAME&

A button that made use of this user-defined command might have the following function:

Function: 	Edit {f}

The function definition for the User command uses the &<parameter>& terminology to specify that a parameter from the command line is to be inserted into the function definition. In the above example, the NAME parameter in the command template is inserted into the function definition where the &NAME& code appears.

The {f} parameter in the second function would take the name of the selected file and pass that as the value of the NAME parameter through to the user command, which would then open the file in Notepad.

Boolean (yes/no) parameters can specify the values that are used for yes or no values. By default a boolean parameter passes 1 if the switch is given on the command line, and 0 if not. Using the &<parameter>:<yesval>:<noval>& parameter in the function definition you can specify the values that are used for yes or no choices.

To create a new User Command, click the Add button, or right-click on the command list and choose Add from the context menu. If someone sends you an already configured command as a .dcf exported command file, you can add it to the list by dragging the file and dropping it on the command list. If someone sends you an already configured command in text format (for example, in an email message), copy it to the clipboard, and then paste it into the User command list by right-clicking and choosing Paste from the context menu. Similarly, you can export your own User commands to give to other people by right-clicking on them and choosing either Copy or Export.


View

The View commands are commands to do with the display of the Lister, including commands to switch between single- and dual-file display modes, turn the Folder Tree on or off, change the current view mode, etc.

•	Check-Box Mode	Set CHECKBOXMODE=Toggle

This command toggles Lister Check-box mode on or off. When check-box mode is enabled, actions that usually take place on selected files instead take place on checked files. This lets you interact with files by double-clicking, context menu or drag and drop without disturbing their selection state. This command appears on the default View menu.

•	Contacts List	Set WINMSGR=Toggle

This command toggles the Contacts List display in the current Lister. The Contact List provides Windows Messenger integration, letting you see a list of your contacts. You can initiate conversations with your contacts by double-clicking on their names, and send files to them with drag and drop onto the Contact List. This command appears on the default View menu.

•	Current Content Type

This command is used to display the Current Content Type field on a toolbar. This field indicates the content type format, if any, that is currently in use for the Lister. You can change formats by selecting them from the drop-down list. This field appears on the default Path toolbar (pathbar.dop).

•	Dual File Display	Set DUAL=Toggle

This command toggles the active Lister between single- and dual-file display modes.

•	Filmstrip Mode	Set LAYOUT=Filmstrip

This command toggles the Lister in and out of Filmstrip mode. Filmstrip mode is a special mode designed for viewing pictures, and consists of a single file display in thumbnails mode, with the Viewer Pane activated.

•	Flat View (Grouped)	Set FLATVIEW=On,Grouped

This command turns on Flat View in "grouped" mode in the current Lister. This command appears on the default View menu.

•	Flat View (Mixed No Folders)	Set FLATVIEW=On,MixedNoFolders

This command turns on Flat View in "mixed no folders" mode in the current Lister. This command appears on the default View menu.

•	Flat View (Mixed)	Set FLATVIEW=On,Mixed

This command turns on Flat View in "mixed" mode in the current Lister. This command appears on the default View menu.

•	Flat View Off	Set FLATVIEW=Off

This command turns off Flat View in the current Lister. This command appears on the default View menu.

•	Flat View Toggle	Set FLATVIEW=Toggle

This command toggles Flat View mode on or off in the current Lister.

•	Folder Formats List	Properties FORMATLIST

This is a dynamic command that generates a list of Defined Folder Formats. You can configure these with the Folder Options function. If you select a format from this list, the current folder will be automatically redisplayed using those settings.

•	Folder Formats Menu	Properties FORMATLIST

This command is similar to the Folder Formats List command except the list of Formats is displayed in a popup submenu instead of in the Toolbar or menu itself.

•	Folder Options	Properties FOLDEROPTIONS

This command displays the Folder Options dialog for the current folder. This lets you modify the display of the current folder and optionally save it to make it the default display for this folder. You can also configure your Defined formats which are displayed by the Folder Formats List and associated commands.

•	Folder Options List	Properties FOLDEROPTIONS
 	Properties FORMATLIST

This is a menu button which opens the Folder Options  dialog when you click the button itself. The arrow opens a drop-down menu which contains a dynamically generated list of your Defined Folder Formats. You can select a Format from this list to automatically redisplay the current format using those settings.

•	Folder Properties	Properties LISTER

This command displays the system Properties dialog for the current folder in the active Lister. This is the equivalent of using the Go Up command to go back to the parent of the current folder and then selecting Properties for the folder itself.

•	Folder Tree	Set TREE=Toggle

This command toggles the Folder Tree display for the current Lister on or off.

•	Format Lock	Set FORMATLOCK=Toggle

This can replace the format lock (padlock) in the default status bar. If you wish to move this functionality to a toolbar or menu (if, for instance, you have turned your status bar off), then you can use this command to do it.

•	FTP Site Properties	Properties FTPSITE

This command displays the Properties dialog for the currently connected FTP site. This lets you modify parameters for the current connection. You can also choose to have the changes stored in the FTP Address Book and therefore made permanent for this FTP site.

•	Hide Files Field

This command adds a text entry field (with drop-down history list) to a Toolbar that lets you enter a wildcard pattern to immediately hide files in the current Lister. It is equivalent to editing the Hide Files Filter through Folder Options.

•	Hide Folders Field

This command is similar to Hide Files Field (above) except that it is used to hide folders in the current Lister rather than files.

•	Lister Styles – Drop-Down	Prefs STYLEEDIT
 	Prefs STYLELIST

This command adds a drop-down menu button. The button itself opens the Lister Styles page in Preferences, letting you edit your Lister Styles. The drop-down menu displays a dynamically generated list of your configured Lister Styles; selecting a style from this List automatically applies the style to the current Lister.

•	Lister Styles – List	Prefs STYLELIST

This command displays a dynamically generated list of your configured Lister Styles.

•	Lister Styles – Tabs

This command adds a row of tabs to a toolbar, with one tab for each of your configured Lister Styles. Switching to a new style is a simple as clicking on a new tab. If you right-click on a tab a context menu is displayed that lets you make changes to that tab without opening the Preferences dialog. The Style Tabs appear on the default Styles toolbar (tabbar.dop).

•	Output Window	Set OUTPUT=Toggle

This command toggles the display of the Output Window.

•	Refresh	Go REFRESH

This command refreshes the display of the current folder in the active Lister.

•	Refresh All	Go REFRESH=All

This command refreshes the display of both folders (in a dual-file display Lister) and the Folder Tree (if open).

•	Refresh Both	Go REFRESH=Both

This command refreshes the display of both folders in a dual-file display Lister.

•	Refresh Tree	Go REFRESH=Tree

This command refreshes the display of the Folder Tree.

•	Show Files Field

This command adds a text entry field (with drop-down history list) to a Toolbar that lets you enter a wildcard pattern to immediately show files in the current Lister (only files that match the pattern will be displayed). It is equivalent to editing the Show Files Filter through Folder Options.

•	Show Folders Field

This command is the same as Show Files Field (above) except that the wildcard pattern is used to show folders rather than files. This command is the same as Show Files Field (above) except that the wildcard pattern is used to show folders rather than files.

•	Status Bar	Set STATUSBAR=Toggle

This command lets you toggle the status bar on and off in the current Lister. This command appears on the default View menu.

•	View As Large Icons	Set VIEW=LargeIcons

This command sets the view mode of the active Lister to Large Icons.

•	View As Small Icons	Set VIEW=SmallIcons

This command sets the view mode of the active Lister to Small Icons.

•	View In Details Mode	Set VIEW=Details

This command sets the view mode of the active Lister to Details.

•	View In List Mode	Set VIEW=List

This command sets the view mode of the active Lister to List.

•	View In Power Mode	Set VIEW=Power

This command sets the view mode of the active Lister to the special Directory Opus Power Mode.

•	View In Thumbnails Mode	Set View=Thumbnails

This command sets the view mode of the active Lister to the special Directory Opus Thumbnails Mode (this may not be available for some folders).

•	View Mode Cycle	Set View=Cycle

This command defines a menu button that lets you cycle through the available view modes for the current Lister. Clicking the arrow displays a drop-down menu that lets you select the view mode directly.

•	Viewer Pane	Set VIEWPANE=Toggle

This command is used to turn the Viewer Pane on or off in the current Lister.


Opus Raw Commands

The raw command set is the underlying set of commands upon which all of the predefined commands are based. It consists of a small set of core commands, most of which take a diverse array of parameters which gives rise to the multiplicity of functions available in Directory Opus.

Internally, all Toolbar buttons are represented in terms of the raw command set. When you drag a predefined command from the Customize window and drop it on a Toolbar, it is converted to the appropriate raw command with the necessary parameters defined. You can then edit the new button and add, modify or delete those parameters to further customize the command as you wish. Using the New Button function you can even add an empty button to a Toolbar which you can define to run any function you wish using the raw command set.

Most raw commands have a template which defines the parameters that the commands accept. The template is of the form:

<Option [<Qualifiers>]>,<Option [<Qualifiers>]>, …

Options in the template are separated by commas. Options can be followed by optional parameters called Qualifiers. The list below shows the various qualifiers that options may use. You do not enter the qualifier when you are using an option – it exists simply to indicate the type of the option.

/S  Switch. Indicates a binary switch qualifier. The switch will be set if the option appears in the command-line.

/O  Switch with optional arguments. The same as /S but takes optional arguments where the default action can be modified. For example, the Copy command takes an option UPDATEEXISTING, which may have none, size or date as a qualifying parameter.

/K  Keyword. This means that the option will not be accepted unless the keyword appears. For example if the template is "Name/K", then unless "Name=<string>" or "Name <string>" appears in the command line, Name will not be accepted.

/A  Required. This keyword or a value for it must be supplied, or else the entire command line will be invalid.

/M  Multiple strings. This means the argument will take any number of strings. Any arguments not considered to be part of another option will be added to this option.

If no qualifier is provided then the option will be filled by any text not matching another option. For example, the command Filetype takes an option, ACTION, which may be one of either drop, dropshift, dropctrl, dropalt, dblclk, dblclkshift, dblclkctrl, or dblclkalt. Thus you may say either ACTION=drop or just use parameter drop by itself.

Quite often you can combine multiple options within the same command, especially switch options indicated by the /S parameter. The documentation below describes the situations where this makes sense.


CLI

This command opens the Directory Opus CLI (command-line interpreter) interface. This is a very simple keyboard interface to the Directory Opus command set. It lets you enter commands and have them run immediately without having to set up Toolbar buttons first. You will not normally need to use this.

The CLI command can also be used to open a DOS prompt box with the current directory set to the path of the active Lister. The command template is:

DOSPROMPT/O[<here>, selfolder]

•	DOSPROMPT=here (or DOSPROMPT with no parameters) opens a DOS prompt which CDs to the path of the active Lister.

•	DOSPROMPT=selfolder opens a DOS prompt which CDs to the currently selected sub-folder in the active Lister.


Clipboard

The Clipboard command performs Clipboard-related functions. This command requires exactly one option to be specified on the command line. The command template is:

ADD/S, COPY/S, COPYNAMES/O[<full>, nopaths, url, hash, hash2, unc,short], CUT/S, NOFROMFOCUS/S, PASTE/S, PASTESHORTCUT/S, USESEL/S

•	ADD/S: Specify the ADD switch when using COPY or CUT. The selected files will be added to the existing clipboard contents instead of replacing any files that were already on the clipboard. This lets you copy files from multiple locations into the one folder with a single paste.

•	COPY/S: With this option specified the Clipboard command copies all currently selected files and folders in the active Lister to the clipboard. The files on the clipboard can then be pasted into another folder using the Clipboard PASTE command.

•	COPYNAMES/O: This option copies the names of all selected files to the clipboard in ASCII text. It does not copy the files themselves. By default the full pathnames are copied but if you specify nopaths then only the names of the files are copied. If you specify url, the filenames will be copied as if they are URLs. You can also specify hash or hash2 to copy the MD5 checksums of the selected files to the clipboard. The output of hash is more readable, whereas hash2 outputs in a format compatible with the MD5Sum program.

This switch can also take the unc parameter. If you are copying the names of files on a network share, specifying unc causes them to be copied using their UNC pathnames rather than using the shared drive letter. For example, E:\Leo.txt may resolve to \\Work_Server\Drive_E\Leo.txt.

Specify the short parameter to copy the short (8.3) names of files.

•	CUT/S: This option is similar to the COPY option, except that when the files are pasted into another folder, the original files are deleted. Note that when you Cut files, the files are not actually deleted until they are pasted into a new location.

•	NOFROMFOCUS/S: This switch replaces the old FROMFOCUS option; the default behavior for this command is now to operate on either the source file display or the tree, whichever has input focus. You can disable this and return to the previous behavior of only operating on the file display with the NOFROMFOCUS switch.

•	PASTE/S: The Clipboard PASTE command pastes files and folders that are currently on the clipboard into the active Lister. If the files that are on the clipboard were put there by a Cut command rather than a Copy command, the original files will be deleted.

•	PASTESHORTCUT/S: This option pastes shortcuts to the files that are on the clipboard into the active Lister. Shortcuts are small files that refer to the original files – the original files themselves are not moved or copied when this option is specified.

•	USESEL/S: By default the Clipboard PASTE and PASTESHORTCUT commands paste into the source folder. If you specify the USESEL and there is a selected sub-folder in the source Lister, the paste will take place in that sub-folder instead of the parent folder. This is used for the Paste context menu command for the All Files and Folders file type.


Close

The Close command is used to close Listers, exit the program or shutdown the entire system. The default behavior of the command, with no options specified on the command line, is to close the active Lister. The command template is:

ALLLISTERS/S, ALLOTHERLISTERS/S, AT/K, CANCEL/S, IN/K, PROGRAM/S, QUIET/S, SYSTEM/O[<logoff>, restart, shutdown, poweroff, force, forceifhung], TOGGLE/S, WHENFINISHED/S

•	ALLLISTERS/S: The Close ALLLISTERS command closes all currently open Listers. The program itself is left running.

•	ALLOTHERLISTERS/S: Specifying this parameter will close all Listers except the current Lister

•	AT/K: Used with the SYSTEM switch, this allows you to schedule an automatic shutdown of your system at a given time. The time must be specified in HH:MM:SS format using a 24 hour clock. If the time you specify is less than the current time, it will be taken to refer to the next day. When the time you specify is reached, a 10 second countdown timer is displayed before the system is shutdown.

•	CANCEL/S: You can use this switch to cancel a previously-scheduled auto-shutdown.

•	IN/K: Similar to the AT switch, this lets you schedule an automatic shutdown after a given period of time. The time must be specified in HH:MM:SS format (or MM:SS or just SS).

•	PROGRAM/S: With this option specified the Close command closes the Directory Opus program. All currently open Listers and other windows are automatically closed.

•	QUIET/S: Normally when the SYSTEM switch is used, a confirmation dialog is displayed giving you a chance to cancel the shutdown. Using the QUIET switch prevents this dialog from being shown.

•	SYSTEM/O: The SYSTEM switch lets you shutdown the system from an Opus button The options for CLOSE SYSTEM are:

•	force: Use this in addition to the other options to force the system to shutdown even if some programs are not responding (note: the system will shutdown immediately and you may lose unsaved data)

•	forceifhung: This is only available under Windows 2000 or later, and it works the same as the force option but only if there are any non-responding programs. Otherwise, the shutdown proceeds as normal.

•	logoff: This is the default action and will log the current user off the system

•	poweroff: This shuts the system down and powers off the computer (you need an ATX-compatible motherboard and power-supply for the computer to be powered off)

•	restart: This restarts (reboots) the system

•	shutdown: This shuts the system down (depending on your system, this may also power off the computer, or it may display the "Your computer is now safe to be shutdown" screen)

•	TOGGLE/S: Use this switch in conjunction with the scheduled-shutdown options to toggle scheduled shutdown on or off. If used in a Toolbar or menu it causes the button to appear checked or highlighted when a shutdown is scheduled and unchecked when not. For example:

Close SYSTEM=poweroff,force WHENFINISHED QUIET TOGGLE

•	WHENFINISHED/S: This lets you schedule an automatic shutdown when all outstanding functions have completed. For example, when you are downloading a large amount of data via FTP, you could use this to have the computer automatically shutdown when the download is complete. Note that if there are currently no functions executing, the shutdown will be triggered immediately!


ContextMenu

The ContextMenu command lets you send system context menu commands directly to files and folders. This can be used to set up buttons that automatically perform functions that usually take two or three steps to access, for example emptying the Recycle Bin. The context menu commands available can vary from system to system and OS to OS, so your mileage with this command may vary. The command template is:

FILE/K/M, ID/K/N, SHOWCMDS/S, VERB

•	FILE/K/M: Use the FILE argument to specify the file or system namespace folder to perform context menu commands on. If you do not specify a file the action is performed on all selected files and folders in the current Lister.

•	ID/K/N: Used to specify the command ID to execute.

•	SHOWCMDS/S: Causes Opus to display a dialog containing the available context menu commands for the specified files.

•	VERB: Used to specify the command verb to execute. If verbs are available they should be used in preference to command IDs.

The first step in using the ContextMenu command is to use the SHOWCMDS switch to view the available context menu commands. Open the Directory Opus CLI, then select the desired file in the source Lister. Enter the command ContextMenu SHOWCMDS in the CLI. Directory Opus will display a list of the available commands for that file. The number preceding the command name is the command ID – a numeric identifier for the command. Some commands may also have a verb displayed following the command name. Verbs are English-language keywords that can be used to trigger commands, and are easier to use than command IDs.

If you want to use the ContextMenu command on a system namespace folder like the Recycle Bin, you need the GUID for the namespace. A description of GUIDs is beyond the scope of this documentation, however as an example, the Recycle Bin’s GUID is {645FF040-5081-101B-9F08-00AA002F954E}. To discover the available context menu commands for the Recycle Bin, you would enter the following command in the Opus CLI:

ContextMenu SHOWCMDS FILE=::{645FF040-5081-101B-9F08-00AA002F954E}

Under Windows XP and 2000 at least, one of the available commands displayed will be similar to:

168: Empty Recycle Bin (empty)

From this we can see that the command ID to empty the Recycle Bin is 168, and it also has the verb empty. Note that the command ID may be different on your system. Once we have this information, we can set up a button to empty the recycle bin automatically. Create a new button in the normal way, and enter the following command for its function definition:

ContextMenu VERB=empty FILE=::{645FF040-5081-101B-9F08-00AA002F954E}

You should find that clicking this button now causes your Recycle Bin to automatically be emptied.


Copy

The Copy command handles file copying and moving functions. The default behavior of the command, with no options specified on the command line, is to copy all selected files and folders in the active Lister to the destination folder. The command template is:

ADDTOZIP/S, AS/O, BURNCD/S, DUPLICATE/S, EXTRACT/O[<top>, sub, checkout], FILE/M, FILTER/O[<always>, shift, alt, ctrl], FORCE/S, HERE/S, INSTALLFONT/S, MAKESHORTCUT/S, MOVE/S, MOVEWHENSAME/S, NOZIPBATCH/S, RENAMEWHENSAME/S, SENDMAIL/O, SENDTO/K, TO/K, UPDATEALL/S, UPDATEEXISTING/O[<both>, size, date], UPDATETOLERANCE/K/N, WHENEXISTS/O[<default>, ask, skip, replace, rename, resume], WINMSGR/K[list, submenu, user], ZIP/O[<all>, single]

•	ADDTOZIP/S: This option adds all selected files and folders to a ZIP file. It is similar to the ZIP option except that Directory Opus will prompt for the ZIP file name and location, and compression/password parameters. This command yields the same result as right-clicking on several files and choosing Add To Zip... from the context menu.

•	AS/O: This option causes the Copy function to ask for new file names. You can use this option by itself (in which case the files are copied with new names), or in conjunction with the MOVE option, in which case the files are moved with new names. If you specify AS by itself you will be prompted for the new file name(s), however you can specify the new name (or a wildcard pattern) directly using AS=<name>.

•	BURNCD/S: This option is only supported under Windows XP, and lets you invoke the system CD Burning Wizard.

•	DUPLICATE/S: The DUPLICATE option is used by itself, and causes the selected files to be duplicated in the same folder. You will be asked for new names automatically for each file (and you can use wildcards to do batch duplication).

•	EXTRACT/O[<top>,sub,checkout]: This option is mainly used for extracting files from ZIP files, but also operates on folders. It modifies the default behavior of the Copy command. When specified, the contents of the selected ZIP files are copied to the destination, rather than the ZIP files themselves. If you specify EXTRACT=sub the contents are extracted to a new subfolder in the destination. For example, the contents of the file test.zip would be extracted to a new subfolder called test in the destination folder.

The behavior of this option can be modified with the HERE switch, which causes the contents to be extracted to the source folder rather than the destination.

If you specify EXTRACT=checkout the entire contents of the ZIP file are automatically extracted to a temporary folder, and then the temporary folder is displayed in a new Lister.

•	FILE/M/F: This lets you specify the name of the file (or files) to copy

•	FILTER/O[<always>,shift,alt,ctrl]: This option lets you specify a filter to be used for the copy or move without having to turn the Copy Filter option on through Preferences. For example, you could set up a button where the left button function copied files normally, and the right button function prompted you for a filter every time.

When the FILTER option is given by itself you will be prompted every time to define a filter for the copy. If one of the optional keywords is given as the value for the FILTER option, you will only be prompted to define a filter if the appropriate key is held down when the function is selected. For example, FILTER=shift means that you would be asked to define a filter if the Shift key is held down; otherwise no filter will be used.

You can also specify the name of a predefined filter as the value of the FILTER option. For example, Copy FILTER=testfilter would use a predefined filter called testfilter as the filter, and you would not be prompted to define one.

•	FORCE/S	: Suppress prompts and automatically replace existing files

•	HERE/S: With this option set, the Copy command uses the source Lister as destination as well. It is used in conjunction with the MAKESHORTCUT and EXTRACT options. For example, Copy MAKESHORTCUT HERE causes the shortcuts to be placed in the same folder as the source files rather than in the destination folder.

•	INSTALLFONT/S: This flag lets you install fonts. For example, you could add the command Copy INSTALLFONT to the context menu for font files (.ttf, .ttc, .fon and .fnt). Then, you could select this command to automatically copy the font files to the Windows Fonts folder and add them to the system. --Even without this flag, Opus will automatically detect if you are copy font files to the Windows Fonts folder and will add them to the system for you.

•	MAKESHORTCUT/S: With this option specified, the Copy command does not copy the selected files and folders – instead, it creates shortcuts to them in the destination folder. You can modify this behavior with the HERE option to cause the shortcut to be created in the source folder.

•	MOVE/S: With the MOVE option specified, the Copy command moves all selected files and folders to the destination instead of copying them.

•	MOVEWHENSAME/S: This option modifies the default behavior of the Copy command. If the destination folder is on the same physical device as the source folder, the selected files are automatically moved to the destination rather than copied. It is mainly used in the default drag and drop function to emulate the behavior of Explorer.

•	NOZIPBATCH/S: This option disables the ZIP batch extract and add modes for the duration of this function only.

•	RENAMEWHENSAME/S: This option modifies the behavior of the Copy command when the files you are copying already exist in the destination folder. Usually attempting to copy a file over an existing file produces a ‘Replace this file?’ confirmation dialog. With this option specified, the copied files are automatically given new names so they do not clash with existing files.

•	SENDMAIL/O: This command lets you send the currently selected files as email attachments using your default email client. You can optionally specify the recipient’s email address as a parameter to the COPY SENDMAIL command; however this only works if the Use MAPI option is enabled in the Miscellaneous /Internet Settings section of Preferences. SENDMAIL can be used on its own or in conjunction with the ZIP and ADDTOZIP options.

•	SENDTO/K: This option lets you set up a button to activate a ‘Send To’ menu item for selected without actually going to the context menu. For example, you could have a button to automatically activate the ‘Send To -> Web Publishing Wizard’ function. The value for the SENDTO option must be the name of the actual file in the system ‘SendTo’ folder. For example,

Copy SENDTO="Web Publishing Wizard"

•	TO/K: This option lets you specify the destination path of the copy operation. For example, you could set up a Copy button that always copied the selected files to a specific folder rather than the destination Lister. TO=ask causes Opus to prompt for a destination path even if there is already a destination Lister. TO=ask$ can be used in a multi-command function so that you are only asked for the path once even if there are multiple COPY commands specified.

•	UPDATEALL/S: This option is used to update files, for example from your local computer to a network drive or FTP site. The only files that will actually be copied to the destination folder are those files that: --do not exist already in the destination, or --do exist in the destination but are different to the files in the source.

Files that do not meet either of these two criteria are not copied. This is a useful way, for example, to update your web site on a remote FTP server without transferring files unnecessarily.

A file is defined as being different if its timestamp or size has changed – the contents of the file itself are not compared.

•	UPDATEEXISTING/O[<both>,size,date]: This option is very similar to the UPDATEALL option, except that files in the destination folder are only updated if they already exist and are different from the source files. Files that do not already exist in the destination are not copied. By default Opus checks both file size and date to determine which files are different, however you can limit this test to either size or date by specifying the option on the command line.

•	UPDATETOLERANCE/N/K: This option lets you specify the number of seconds tolerance that Opus uses when comparing files for the UPDATEALL and UPDATEEXISTING functions. The default tolerance is one second, meaning that files are treated as being the same (and therefore will not be updated) if their timestamps are within plus or minus one second. This is to accommodate file updates between systems with different time resolutions (for example, Windows 98 has a two second time resolution whereas Windows 2000 is accurate to one second or even less). Set UPDATETOLERANCE=0 if you want file times to have to match exactly, or to a larger number to make the test even more tolerant of time differences.

•	WHENEXISTS/O: Use this parameter to specify what happens when files you are copying already exist in the destination. This parameter overrides the options set in Preferences. You can choose to ask (ask what to do for each existing file), skip (skip all existing files) or replace (replace all existing files). You can also choose rename which will automatically rename any new files that already exist. Finally when copying FTP files you can also specify resume to automatically resume the transfer of any existing files.

•	WINMSGR/K: This parameter lets you use Directory Opus’s Windows Messenger integration to automatically initiate a file transfer to a user on your Contact List. Specifying list or submenu for this acts as a dynamic button to generate a list of your online contacts. You can also specify the email address (sign-in name) of a contact to automatically transfer selected files to that contact (for example, Copy WINMSGR=fred@bloggs.com)

•	ZIP/O[<all>,single]: This option provides a quick way to ZIP a single file or folder to the destination folder. For example, if a folder called Pictures was selected, the Copy ZIP command would ZIP this folder to a new ZIP file in the destination folder called Pictures.zip.

If more than one file is selected, then by default all selected files are zipped to a single ZIP file that uses the name of the first selected file. However, if you specify ZIP=single, then each selected file is zipped in turn to its own ZIP file.


CreateFolder

The CreateFolder command is used to create new folders and ZIP files. With no options specified, you are prompted to enter the name of the folder to create. The folder is created in the source Lister. The command template is:

FROMCLIPBOARD/S, INLINE/S, NAME/M, NOUPDATESETTINGS/S, READAUTO/O[<yes>,no,dual,tab,nofocus], ZIP/S

•	FROMCLIPBOARD/S: If this parameter is specified the CreateFolder command will automatically create a new folder using the text that is currently on the clipboard for the name of the folder.

•	INLINE/S: When this option is specified, CreateFolder behaves like the Windows Explorer New Folder command. That is the folder is created immediately using a default name, and then inline renaming is activated, allowing you to edit its name.

•	NAME/M:  The NAME option can be used to specify the name of the folder to create. If this is given, you are not prompted to enter the folder name. This is a default option, meaning that you do not need to specify the NAME keyword – any text other than another option will be used as the value for this option. The NAME parameter can be used to specify multiple folders to create simultaneously. You can also specify full qualified paths here to create folders in locations other than the current source Lister.

•	NOUPDATESETTINGS/S: Normally when you use the Create Folder command it remembers its last settings (the state of the "read auto" and "create multiple folders" options) as the default for next time. If you specify the NOUPDATESETTINGS switch then the default settings will not be updated.

•	READAUTO/O: Specifying this option lets you set the default state of the Read new folder automatically flag in the CreateFolder dialog. When READAUTO is specified by itself or with the yes parameter, the newly created folder will be automatically read into the current Lister. Specifying READAUTO=no disables the automatic reading of the new folder. READAUTO=dual will read the newly created folder into the opposite display in a dual-file display Lister. You can also read the new folder into a new Folder Tab using READAUTO=tab – specify READAUTO=tab,nofocus if you don’t want the new tab to become the active one. You can also combine dual with the tab option.

•	ZIP/S: With this option specified, Directory Opus creates a new ZIP file rather than a new folder. You can also use this in conjunction with the NAME option.


Delete

The Delete command is used to delete files and folders. It can attempt to send files to the Windows Recycle Bin, and can also permanently delete files. When used with no options, the default behavior is to delete all selected files and folders in the source Lister. Depending on the current Preferences settings, this may involve attempting to use the Recycle Bin. The command template is:

ALL/S, FILE/M, FILTER/O[<always>,shift,alt,ctrl], FORCE/S, NOFROMFOCUS/S, NORECYCLE/S, QUIET/S, RECYCLE/S, REMOVECOLLECTION/S, SECURE/O, SHIFT/S

•	ALL/S: This option modifies the behavior of the Delete command, causing it to override the settings in the File Operations section of Preferences concerning warnings shown before each file and/or folder.

•	FILE/M: You can specify filenames for the FILE option. Without this option specified, all selected files and folders in the source Lister will be deleted.

•	FILTER/O[<always>,shift,alt,ctrl]: This option lets you specify a filter to be used for the delete function without having to turn the Delete Filter option on through Preferences. For example, you could set up a button where the left button function deleted files normally, and the right button function prompted you for a filter every time.

When the FILTER option is given by itself you will be prompted every time to define a filter for the delete. If one of the optional keywords is given as the value for the FILTER option, you will only be prompted to define a filter if the appropriate key is held down when the function is selected. For example, FILTER=shift means that you would asked to define a filter if the Shift key is held down, otherwise no filter will be used.

You can also specify the name of a predefined filter as the value of the FILTER option. For example, Delete FILTER=testfilter would use a predefined filter called testfilter as the filter, and you would not be prompted to define one.

•	FORCE/S: This option causes any files that are marked as Read Only to be automatically deleted, instead of displaying an error message and giving you the option of clearing the read only attribute.

•	NOFROMFOCUS/S: This switch replaces the old FROMFOCUS option; the default behavior for this command is now to operate on either the source file display or the tree, whichever has input focus. You can disable this and return to the previous behavior of only operating on the file display with the NOFROMFOCUS switch.

•	NORECYCLE/S: This option will never attempt to use the Windows Recycle Bin, but instead will permanently delete the files. It overrides the setting in the File Operations section of Preferences.

•	QUIET/S: This option causes the delete to be carried out without first prompting for confirmation from the user. It also suppresses the display of any errors that may occur during the delete procedure.

•	RECYCLE/S: This option will always attempt to send the files to the Windows Recycle Bin. It overrides the setting in the File Operations section of Preferences.

•	REMOVECOLLECTION/S: This switch is used to remove files from File Collections. If you use the normal Delete command in a File Collection, the real files will be deleted. If the REMOVECOLLECTION switch is specified then the selected files will be removed from the collection without deleting the actual files themselves. This command is assigned to the right-button function of the Delete button on the default toolbar.

•	SECURE/O: Use this parameter to securely wipe files using the new Secure Wipe feature. You can specify the number of wipes to perform as an argument to this parameter, otherwise the value defined in Preferences will be used.

•	SHIFT/S: This option causes Directory Opus to emulate the behavior of Explore. If this option is specified, and the Shift key is held down when the Delete function is selected, the behavior of the function changes from the default, depending upon the Windows Recycle Bin setting in Preferences.

With the Recycle Bin enabled, holding down the Shift key acts as if the Recycle Bin option is not turned on. With the Recycle Bin turned off, holding down the Shift key acts as if the ALL and FORCE options are specified. In either case, if the Shift key is not held down when the Delete function is selected, the SHIFT option has no effect.


Favorites

The Favorites command handles operations involved the user-defined Favorites List, as well as the SmartFavorites™ system. When used by itself with no options, it behaves as a dynamic command and generates a list of your Favorite Folders to be displayed in the Toolbar or menu it is used in. The command template is:

ADD/O[<path>, nameonly], EDIT/S, NEW/S, NEWTAB/O[<normal>, nofocus], OPENINDEST/S, OPENINDUAL/S, OPENINLEFT/S, OPENINRIGHT/S, PATH, SHOWICONS/S, SMART/O

•	ADD/O: The ADD parameter can now be specified with nameonly. This causes folders to be added to the Favorites list with their labels set to only the name of the folder, rather than the full path.

•	ADD/S: The ADD option adds a new folder to your Favorites List. By default, the folder currently displayed in the active Lister is added to the list. If you have specified a value for the PATH option, however, that path is added to the Favorites List instead.

•	EDIT/S: This option causes the Preferences window to be opened, and the Favorites section automatically displayed.

•	NEW/S: This switch modifies the behavior of the Favorites command when it is acting as a dynamic command (either with no other options specified, or with the SMART parameter given). It causes a new Lister to be opened when the user selects a folder from the Favorites List, rather than opening the folder in the current Lister.

•	NEWTAB/S: This switch causes a new Folder Tab to be opened when the user selects a folder from the Favorites list.

•	OPENINDEST/S: This switch is similar to the NEW option, except that it causes the folder to be read into the destination file display of a dual-file display Lister. The Lister is automatically set into dual-file display mode if it is not already. If combined with the NEWTAB option the new Folder Tab will be opened in the destination window.

•	OPENINDUAL/S: Opens the folder in the opposite file display of a dual-file display Lister.

•	OPENINLEFT/S: Opens the folder in the left-hand file display of a dual display Lister.

•	OPENINRIGHT/S: Opens the folder in the right-hand file display of a dual display Lister.

•	PATH: The PATH option has two uses. The first (and most useful) is to act as a simple filter for the dynamic nature of the function when generating a Favorites List. If you specify a value for the PATH option, only folders in the Favorites List that match the value you specify are added to the dynamic list. For example, Favorites C: would cause only Favorite Folders beginning with C: to be displayed.

•	OPENINDUAL/S: This switch is similar to the NEW option, except that it causes the folder to be read into the opposite file display of a dual-file display Lister. The Lister is automatically set into dual-file display mode if it is not already.

•	PATH: The PATH option has two uses. The first (and most useful) is to act as a simple filter for the dynamic nature of the function when generating a Favorites List. If you specify a value for the PATH option, only folders in the Favorites List that match the value you specify are added to the dynamic list. For example, Favorites C: would cause only favorite folders beginning with C: to be displayed.

The PATH option can also be used in conjunction with the ADD option to specify the name of the folder to add to the Favorites List.

•	SHOWICONS/S: The SHOWICONS switch modifies the behavior of the Favorites command when it is acting as a dynamic command. It causes icons to be displayed in the generated list of Favorites folders. Without this switch, only the folder names are shown.

•	SMART/O: With this option specified, Favorites is a dynamic command that generates a list of your Smart Favorites (folders automatically added by the SmartFavorites™ system). This option takes an optional value which specifies the maximum number of Smart Favorites to display; for example, Favorites SMART=10.


Filetype

The Filetype command is used to trigger and control file type-related functions. This function has no effect if no options are specified. The command template is as follows:

ACTION, CONTEXTFORCE/S, CONTEXTMENU/O, CONTEXTOPTIONS/K, EDIT/S, FILE/K/M, NEW/K, NEWMENU/S, OPENWITHMENU/S, SENDTOMENU/S

•	ACTION: Specify this option to trigger a file type-defined event. For example, you could set up a button that emulates a drag and drop or double-click event. The actual action performed depends upon the type of file involved and the functions defined through the file types system.

The events available are open, explore, find, print, drop, dropshift, dropctrl, dropalt, dblclk, dblclkshift, dblclkctrl, dblclkalt, mdblclk, mdblclkalt, mdblclkshift and mdblclkctrl.

•	CONTEXTFORCE/S: This option can be used in conjunction with the CONTEXTMENU option. It allows you to override the Preferences setting that disables Windows context menu items.

•	CONTEXTMENU/O: This option acts as a dynamic command and is used to add system context menu entries to Opus menus and Toolbars. When no value is supplied for this option, the context menu items for all selected files and folders are added. Alternatively, you can specify the name of a registry key to add context menu entries for. The most common value given for this will be CONTEXTMENU=Directory\Background, which is the registry key that defines the context menu for folder backgrounds (shown when you right-click in a blank area of a Lister). You can also specify the CLSID of a shell extension, for example CONTEXTMENU={E9FE4040-3C93-11D4-8006-00201860E88A} would add items from the Directory Opus Zip context menu extension.

•	CONTEXTOPTIONS/K: This option is used to modify the behavior of the CONTEXTMENU option. Currently it only has an effect when the value of CONTEXTMENU is Directory\Background. One of the standard context menu items added by this is the ShellNew menu (which lets you create new files of various types). Using the CONTEXTOPTIONS option you can specify items to include or exclude in the ShellNew menu.

The value of the CONTEXTOPTIONS option has its own command template, which is INCLUDE/K, EXCLUDE/K. Because this is a ‘template within a template’, the value of the CONTEXTOPTIONS option must be enclosed in quotation marks.

For example,

Filetype CONTEXTMENU=Directory\Background CONTEXTOPTIONS="EXCLUDE=.bmp,.zip"

In this example, the options to create new Bitmap files and new ZIP files would be excluded from the ShellNew menu. You can also use EXCLUDE=* to totally disable the ShellNew menu.

You can also specify CONTEXTOPTIONS=windowsonly to add all Windows context menu items in one go. You can use this in conjunction with the CONTEXTFORCE parameter and the Hide Windows items on file context menus Preferences option to move all Windows context menu items to a sub-menu.

•	EDIT/S: This switch causes the FileType command to open the File Type editor dialog and automatically display the file type corresponding to the selected file. You could add the FileType EDIT command to the All Files and Folders file type to enable you to quickly edit the file type definition for any file.

•	FILE/M: This option can be used to specify the file(s) that the file type action is performed upon. If not specified, all selected files in the active Lister will be used.

•	NEW/K: The NEW option is used to automatically create a new file of a certain type. It emulates the behavior of the ShellNew menu (described above). The new file is created in the active Lister

For example, Filetype NEW=.zip would create a new ZIP file in the active Lister. Only files that have a ShellNew registry entry defined for them can be created in this manner.

•	NEWMENU/S: This option is used to display the system Shell New menu (this is the menu that is displayed by default when you right-click on a Lister background and select New)

•	OPENWITHMENU/S: This option is used to display the system ‘Open With’ menu in a context menu.

•	SENDTOMENU/S: This option is used to display the system Send To menu (this is the menu that is displayed by default when you right-click on a file or folder and select Send To)


Find

This command initiates the Directory Opus Find function, which lets you search for files and folders based on filename, attributes and file contents. The Find function can be automated to some extent using the command template:

CLEAR/S, COLLNAME/K, COMPUTERS/S, CONTAINING/K, DELMODE/O, DUPES/S, FILTER/O, GOOGLE/S, IN/K, MD5/S, NAME, RECURSE/O[<yes>, no], SEARCHZIP/S

•	CLEAR/S: When automating the Find function, use the CLEAR switch to clear the previous Find Results before commencing the new search

•	COLLNAME/K: Specify the File Collection to present Find Results in

•	COMPUTERS/S: This switch is used to access the system Search for Computers function

•	CONTAINING/K: This option can be used to specify text to search for. It is only used if the FILTER switch is not given (that is, for a Simple search rather than an Advanced one).

•	DELMODE/S: When automating the Duplicate File Finder this switch specifies delete mode

•	DUPES/S: Search for duplicate files

•	FILTER/S: Specify this to indicate that NAME is the name of a pre-defined filter.

•	GOOGLE/S: Uses the Google Desktop Search engine if installed.

•	IN/K/A: Used to specify the folder in which to search for files. You can also specify multiple drives separated by commas (e.g. C:,D:,E:.) If this parameter is given without the NAME parameter, it sets the starting point for the Find dialog but does not automatically begin searching.

•	MD5/S: Search for duplicate files using the MD5 checksum

•	NAME: Use this parameter to specify a filename to search for, To automate the Find function, you must specify both the NAME and the folder to search in using the IN parameter. The value of NAME can also be the name of a pre-defined filter – in this case, you must also specify the FILTER switch.

•	RECURSE/O: Specify RECURSE to search within sub-folders, and RECURSE=no to only search the folder specified. If this option is not given, the default setting will be used.

•	SEARCHZIP/S: When automating the Find function, search inside ZIP files


GetSizes

Ordinarily, only files have a size displayed in the Lister. This command operates on all selected folders in the active Lister, and makes Directory Opus calculate their size. The size that is displayed is the total size of all files within each folder, and is not necessarily representative of the amount of disk space used by the folder. If a folder contains no files at all, its size will be shown as empty.

If a folder already has a size displayed for it (for example, if you have automatic sizing turned on in the Folder Options section of Preferences), you can use the GetSizes command to recalculate the size manually.

This command has one parameter:

•	NODESELECT/S: If this switch is specified, the GetSizes command will not deselect the folders after calculating their sizes. This switch only works if the Postpone file deselection until end of function option is turned on in Preferences.


Go

The Go command is used to control the current folder displayed in a Lister. It lets you change between folders, move to a specific folder or the parent of the current folder, and access the History, Recent and Favorites lists, and Folder Tab functions. With no options specified the Go command has no effect. The command template is:

BACK/S, BACKLIST/O[<normal>, noicons, keys], CONNECT/S, CURRENT/S, DESTPATH/S, DISCONNECT/S, DRIVEBUTTONS/O[<all>, fixed, network, cdrom, removable, ramdisk, labels, noletters, multifunc, multifunctabs, lettersbeforelabels, offline, online], DUALPATH/K, EXPANDTREE/S, FORWARD/S, FORWARDLIST/O[<normal>, noicons, keys], FROMSEL/S, FTP/S, FTPSITE/K, FTPSITEICONS/S, FTPSITELIST/O, HISTORYLIST/O[<normal>, noicons, keys], LASTACTIVELISTER/S, LAYOUT/K, NEW/O[<position>, max, min, norm, source, dest, lockoff, tree, notree, dual, dualhoriz, nodual, viewpane, noviewpane, findpanel, syncpanel, dupepanel, noutilitypanel], NEWTAB/O[<normal>, nofocus], OPENCONTAINER/O[<parent>, target], OPENINDEST/S, OPENINDUAL/O[<default>, horiz, vert],OPENINLEFT/S,OPENINRIGHT/O[<default>, horiz, vert], PATH, PATHENTRY/O[<source>, dest, left, right], REFRESH/O[<current>, tree, both, all, source, viewpane], REFRESHTHUMBS/O[<always>, shift, alt, ctrl], ROOT/O[<normal>, collapse], SWAP/S, TABCLOSE/S, TABCLOSEALL/O[<all>, left, right], TABDUPLICATE/O[<here>, dual], TABGROUPSAVE/O, TABMOVE/S, TABSELECT/K[first, last, prev, +1, -1,<index>], UP/S, USER/K, VIEW/K[LargeIcons, SmallIcons, List, Details, Power, Thumbnails]

•	BACK/S: The BACK parameter can now be used in conjunction with the UP parameter to combine their behaviors. Go UP BACK causes the parent folder to be read, just as for UP, but the file selection and scroll offset information in the cache will be used if the parent folder has been visited before, just as for BACK.

•	BACKLIST/O: The BACKLIST parameter now has noicons and keys options. If noicons is specified the generated history list will not display icons for each folder. If keys is specified the keys 0 through 9 will be automatically assigned to the first ten items in the history list.

•	CONNECT/S: The CONNECT option displays the system dialog that allows you to connect to (or map) a network drive.

•	CURRENT/S: This option is used to refer to the current folder displayed in the active Lister. It is only used in conjunction with the NEW and OPENINDUAL options. For example, Go CURRENT NEW would open a new Lister showing the same folder as the current Lister.

•	DESTPATH/S: This lets you read the current destination path into the source Lister.

•	DISCONNECT/S: This option displays the system dialog that allows you to disconnect from a mapped network drive.

•	DRIVEBUTTONS/O[<all>, fixed, network, cdrom, removable, ramdisk, labels, noletters,
multifunc]: The DRIVEBUTTONS option acts as a dynamic command that adds buttons representing all disk drives present in your system. With no value defined for this option, a button is added for every disk drive present. Alternatively, you can specify a combination of the values shown above to specify what type of drives buttons should be added. For example, Go DRIVEBUTTONS=fixed,cdrom would add buttons only for fixed disks (hard drives) and cdroms. By default, the drive buttons that are created use the drive letter as their label. If you specify the labels keyword, the drive label will also be used. In conjunction with labels, you can specify noletters to remove the drive letters from the label.The multifunc option causes the drive buttons to be three-button buttons with OPENINLEFT, OPENINRIGHT and NEW as the three functions. Similarly, the multifunctabs option sets the three functions to NEWTAB OPENINLEFT, NEWTAB OPENINRIGHT and NEW.

The Go DRIVEBUTTONS command lets you filter drive letters using + and -. For example, Go DRIVEBUTTONS=-aez would show all drives except A:, E: and Z:. Go DRIVEBUTTONS=+cdf would only show drives C:, D: and F:. You can combine these flags with the other parameters for the DRIVEBUTTONS command, for example Go DRIVEBUTTONS=cdrom,-g would display all CD drives except drive G:. The DRIVEBUTTONS command also has a lettersbeforelabels option which displays the drive letters before the disk label; for example, C: Local Disk instead of Local Disk (C:). The offline and online keywords let you specify what type of network drives to display – by default, both offline and online drives are shown.

•	DUALPATH/K: This lets you specify a path to read into the destination file display of a dual-display Lister. Using the PATH option, you can therefore read paths into both file displays simultaneously.

•	EXPANDTREE/S: Automatically expands the Folder Tree to display the contents of the new folder.

•	FORWARD/S: This option moves forwards in the folder history list (Note that you must move backwards before you can move forwards).

•	FORWARDLIST/O: The Go FORWARDLIST command has new noicons and keys options, as for the Go BACKLIST command.

•	FROMSEL/S: This switch forces Go to use the first selected folder as the path to read. For example, this lets you set up a button or hotkey that opens the selected folder in a new Lister automatically.

•	FTP/S: The Go FTP command opens the FTP Quick Connect dialog, enabling you to manually connect to an FTP site that may not have been entered into the FTP Address Book.

•	FTPSITE/K: This option lets you connect to an FTP site that has been configured in the FTP Address Book. The FTP site must be specified by name – if the FTP site is in a subfolder of the Address Book you must include the complete path of the entry. For example, Go FTPSITE=Public\Microsoft. This is equivalent to Go @Public\Microsoft.

•	FTPSITEICONS/S: The FTPSITEICONS option is used in conjunction with the FTPSITELIST option. When specified, the list of FTP sites that is generated includes default icons for the FTP site entries.

•	FTPSITELIST/O: This option acts as a dynamic command and generates a list of all the FTP sites you have defined in your FTP Address Book. The optional value for this option lets you filter FTP sites based on the site name prefix. For example, Go FTPSITELIST=Public would only display FTP sites beginning with the string Public (as in the previous example for FTPSITE). If no value is specified for this option, all FTP sites are displayed.

•	HISTORYLIST/O: This parameter combines BACKLIST and FORWARDLIST together. The generated list will contain all folders in the Lister history, both forward and back from the current position. The HISTORYLIST parameter also supports the noicons and keys options as with the other commands.

•	LASTACTIVELISTER/S: Specify this switch to have Opus activate and bring to the front the Lister that was most recently active. If the most recently active Lister has been closed, or there are no Listers open at all, the rest of the command arguments are used instead. So for example, Go NEW LASTACTIVELISTER would display the last active Lister if possible, and open a new Lister if not.

•	LAYOUT/K: The LAYOUT argument lets you specify a saved Lister Layout to load when reading the new folder. This is similar to using the Prefs LAYOUT command except that only the first Lister in the specified Layout is used, and you can use all the other parameters of the Go command to override settings from the Layout. For example, Go FROMSEL LAYOUT=Pictures would open the first selected folder in a new Lister using the saved Layout Pictures.

•	NEW/O: This switch can be used in conjunction with most other Go options. It causes the folder in question to be displayed in a new Lister rather in the current Lister. It can be used with the PATH, UP, ROOT, CURRENT, DRIVEBUTTONS, FTPSITE, FTPSITELIST and FTP options.

The NEW parameter takes additional options to control the appearance of the new Lister. You can specify that the Utility Panel be automatically displayed using the findpanel, syncpanel or dupepanel options. Alternatively, if the Utility Panel is on by default and you do not want it to appear in the new Lister, use the noutilitypanel option.

You can optionally specify the position, size and state of the new Lister using parameters to the NEW command. The format is GO NEW <x>,<y>,<w>,<h>,<state>. All arguments are optional but to specify a later argument you must include the commas for the previous ones. For example, to open a new Lister of size 800x600 but keep the default position, you would specify GO NEW ,,800,600. The <state> argument lets you specify the window state and can be either maximize, minimize or normal. You can also specify the Lister state with the keywords source and dest. Additionally, you can configure the tree, dual display mode and the Viewer Pane with the keywords tree, notree, dual, dualhorz, nodual, viewpane, and noviewpane.

•	NEWTAB/O: This parameter opens a new Folder Tab. If no path is specified an empty tab is opened, otherwise the specified folder is read into the new tab. If you specify NEWTAB=nofocus the new tab is not brought to the front. You can combine this with OPENINLEFT, etc to specify which side of the Lister the tab should open on.

•	OPENCONTAINER/O: This switch will open the "container", or the parent folder, of the selected item. It is used in the file context menu for File Collections, to let you quickly go to the actual folder where a file is located. If you specify OPENCONTAINER=target the function will dereference any selected shortcuts and open the folder containing their targets (and the targets will be automatically selected). This is similar to the Find Target button in the system Properties dialog for shortcuts.

•	OPENINDEST/S: The specified folder will be read into the destination file display instead of the source.

•	OPENINDUAL/S: This option is similar to the NEW option, except the new folder is read into the opposite file display in a dual-file display Lister. If the current Lister is not in dual-file display mode, it is automatically set to that mode.

•	OPENINLEFT/S: The specified folder will be read into the left-hand file display of a dual-file display Lister, irrespective of the current source file display. Can also be used with ROOT and UP.

•	OPENINRIGHT/S: The specified folder will be read into the right-hand file display of a dual-file display Lister, irrespective of the current source file display. Can also be used with ROOT and UP.

•	PATH: The PATH option allows you to specify the path to go to. You can enter a physical path here, the name of an FTP Address Book entry, or an alias for a special system folder. If the path you specify contains spaces, you should enclose it with quotation marks. For example,

Go "c:\my documents\my letters\july 2000\"

The system folder aliases understood by the PATH option are as follows:

/admintools	The administration tools folder for the current user (W2K only)
/altstartup	The user’s non-localized Startup program group
/appdata	Application data storage folder
/commonadmintools	The administration tools folder common to all users (W2K only)
/commonaltstartup	Non-localized Startup program group common to all users (NT only)
/commonappdata	Application data folder common to all users (NT only)
/commondesktopdir	Desktop folder  common to all users (Windows NT)
/commondocuments	The documents folder common to all users (NT only)
/commonfavorites	Favorites folder common to all users (Windows NT)
/commonstartmenu	Start menu folder common to all users (Windows NT)
/commonstartup	Startup folder common to all users (Windows NT)
/commonprogramfiles	The program files folder common to all users (NT only)
/commonprograms	Programs folder common to all users (Windows NT)
/commontemplates	The template folder common to all users (NT only)
/controls	The Control Panel
/cookies	Folder used to store Internet cookies
/default	Same as /initial or /last depending on Preferences setting
/defaultright	Same as /initialright or /lastright depending on Preferences setting
/desktop	The Desktop, the root of the namespace
/desktopdir	The physical folder containing Desktop items
/favorites	Your personal Favorites folder
/fonts	Your Fonts folder
/history	Folder used to store Internet History items
/home	The Directory Opus program folder
/initial	The "initial" path set in Preferences for the left-hand file display
/initialright	The "initial" path set in Preferences for the right-hand file display
/internetcache	Folder used to cache Temporary Internet Files
/last	The "last closed Lister" path (for the left-hand file display)
/lastright	The "last closed Lister" path for the right-hand file display
/localappdata	Local Application Data storage folder
/mycomputer	My Computer
/mydocuments	Your personal data folder (My Documents)
/mypictures	Your personal picture folder (My Pictures)
/nethood	The physical folder containing My Network Places links
/network	Network Neighborhood (My Network Places in W2K)
/printers	Printers folder
/printhood	Folder that stores Printer links
/profile	The current user’s profile folder
/programfiles	The Program Files folder (only under W2K or later)
/programs	The folder containing your program groups
/recent	Folder containing your most recently used documents
/sendto	Folder that contains Send To menu items
/start	The folder containing your Start Menu items
/startup	Folder containing programs that are run on startup
/system	The Windows System folder
/temp	The Windows temporary folder
/templates	Personal Templates folder
/trash	The Recycle Bin
/windows	The main Windows folder
You can also add your own path aliases through the Preferences system.

To go to a site in the FTP Address Book, specify the entry name preceded by an @ character. For example,

Go @gpsoftware

The PATH argument also accepts relative paths. For example, Go ..\data would go to a folder called "data" in the parent of the current folder.

•	PATHENTRY/O: The PATHENTRY command has been extended to allow the "pop-up" path field to only refer to a specific file display, rather than the current source file display. You can specify left, right or dest as options for this command. This lets you bind hotkeys to display path fields for the left and right file displays individually.

•	PATHENTRY/S: The Go PATHENTRY command causes a hidden text field to be displayed at the bottom of the active Lister, allowing you to type in a folder path to read. This function is most useful when assigned to a hotkey, as it allows you to change folders in a Lister without using the mouse at all.

•	REFRESH/O[<current>, tree, both, all, source, viewpane]: The REFRESH option is used to re-read and redisplay the folder in the active Lister. With no value defined for this option, only the current folder is refreshed. The tree option causes the Folder Tree to be refreshed (if displayed). The both option causes both file displays of a dual-file display Lister to be refreshed. The all value refreshes both file displays and the Folder Tree. The source value refreshes the source file display and the Folder Tree, but not the destination file display. The viewpane option causes the image currently previewed in the Viewer Pane to be refreshed.

•	REFRESHTHUMBS/O: The Go REFRESHTHUMBS command causes thumbnails displayed in the current Lister to be refreshed. If thumbnail caching is enabled, the thumbnail cache for the current folder is also cleared. This command can take shift, alt and ctrl as optional parameters. If these options are used, thumbnails will only be refreshed if the specified qualifier key is held down when this function is executed.

•	ROOT/O: This option reads the root folder of the active Lister. It only has an effect if the current folder displayed is a file system folder. If you specify ROOT=collapse, the current drive’s branch in the Folder Tree will be automatically collapsed as well.

•	SWAP/S: The folders displayed in the current source and destination will be swapped.

•	TABCLOSE/S: Closes the current Folder Tab.

•	TABCLOSEALL/O: Closes all Folder Tabs except the current one. If you specify TABCLOSEALL=left then only tabs to the left of the current tab are closed – likewise for TABCLOSEALL=right.

•	TABDUPLICATE/O: Duplicates the current Folder Tab. By default the new tab is added to the current file display but you can specify TABDUPLICATE=dual to open the new tab in the other file display.

•	TABGROUPLIST/O: Generates a list of your saved Folder Tab Groups. Specify the keys parameter to automatically assign keyboard shortcuts to the items in the list, and the icons parameter to display icons for the groups.

•	TABGROUPLOAD/K: Load a named Folder Tab Group. Use in conjunction with OPENINRIGHT, etc to specify the file display to load the tabs into.

•	TABGROUPSAVE/O: Save the current set of Folder Tabs as a new (or existing) Tab Group. If no name is specified you will be prompted to enter one.

•	TABMOVE/S: Move the current Folder Tab to the other side of the Lister.

•	TABSELECT/K: Change the current Folder Tab selection. Specify first to select the first tab, last to select the last tab,or +1  and -1 to select the next and previous tabs in sequence. You can also specify TABSELECT=prev to select the previously selected tab.

•	UP/S: The Go UP command reads the parent of the current folder in the active Lister.

•	USER/K: The USER option is used in conjunction with the special system folder aliases used by the PATH option. It allows you to specify an alternative user for the system folder (for those system folders that support per-user configuration). For example, Go /desktopdir USER="Fred Bloggs" would read the Desktop folder for the user called Fred Bloggs rather than the current user. Of course this will only be successful if you have the appropriate access permissions.

•	VIEW/K: The VIEW parameter lets you specify the view mode to use for the new folder. For example, Go C:\Pictures NEW VIEW=Thumbnails would open the specified folder in a new Lister and display it in Thumbnails mode automatically.


Help

The Help command is used to display program information and to gain access to the online help system. When used by itself, the default behavior is to access the online help system and display the contents page. The command template for this command is:

ABOUT/S, CHECKUPDATE/O, LICENCEMANAGER/S, NEWEMAIL/S, MANUAL/S

•	ABOUT/S: This command displays the Directory Opus About screen, which contains information about the current version of the program, copyright and contact details for technical support, as well as your registration details (or expiry date in case of an evaluation registration).

•	CHECKUPDATE/O: This command activates the automatic check for a new version of Directory Opus. You will be prompted to establish an Internet connection if one is not already present.

•	LICENCEMANAGER/S: This option displays the Licence Manager, which lets you view details about your current Program Certificate and install a new Certificate if required.

•	NEWEMAIL/S: The Help NEWEMAIL lets you access the extremely simply built-in email client in Directory Opus 8 to send a new email message. To use this you must have configured your SMTP server settings in Preferences.

•	MANUAL/S: This command opens the Directory Opus manual, providing it has been installed in your Opus program folder. If the manual can not be found you will be given the option to download it.


Image

ADDSUFFIX/S, AS/K, BACKGROUND/K, CONVERT/O[<interactive>, jpg, png, gif, bmp], HEIGHT/K/N, HERE/S, NOENLARGE/S, NOREDUCE/S, PRESERVEASPECTRATIO/S, PRESERVEDATE/S, QUALITY/K/N, REPLACE/S, ROTATE/K[90,80,270, EXIF], TO/K, WIDTH/K/N

The Image command is used to access the Image Conversion function in Directory Opus. Use the Image CONVERT command to display the image conversion dialog in interactive mode. In this mode, all image conversion parameters are set using a dialog. Image conversion takes place on all selected image files. If any of the other parameters of this command are used the dialog is not displayed, and the image conversion runs in non-interactive mode.

For example, a possible function to automatically convert all selected images to 100x100 JPG, suitable for thumbnails on a website, might be:

Image CONVERT=jpg WIDTH=100 HEIGHT=100 PRESERVEASPECTRATIO QUALITY=50

To automatically rotate all selected images "in-place" (overwriting the existing images) by 90 degrees, without changing their type, use the following command:

Image CONVERT ROTATE=90 HERE REPLACE

The command template is:

ADDSUFFIX/S, AS/K, CONVERT/O[<interactive>, jpg, png, gif, bmp], HEIGHT/K/N, HERE/S, PRESERVEASPECTRATIO/S, QUALITY/K/N, REPLACE/S, ROTATE/K/N[90,80,270], TO/K, WIDTH/K/N

•	ADDSUFFIX/S: When resizing images, this parameter adds a suffix to the output filename appropriate to the new size of the image. The suffix -small is appended for 640x480, -medium for 800x600, -large for 1024x768 and –ppc for 240x320 (a special resolution for PocketPC devices). For all other image sizes, the actual resolution is appended to the filename.

•	AS/K: The AS parameter can be used to specify a different output filename. By default the output filename is the same as the input filename, with the possibility of an additional suffix (when the ADDSUFFIX switch is used) and a different file extension if the image has been converted to a different type.

•	BACKGROUND/K: This is used to specify the background color to use when converting alpha-channel images. Specify as an RGB color either in hex (eg BACKGROUND=#ff8000) or decimal (eg BACKGROUND=255,128,0)

•	CONVERT/O: The CONVERT parameter initiates the Image Conversion function. If specified without any other options, the Image Conversion dialog is displayed. You can specify an output image type here to automate the conversion process. Supported output types are jpg (JPEG), png (PNG), gif (GIF) and bmp (Bitmap).

•	HEIGHT/K/N: Used to specify the new height of the converted image

•	HERE/S: Causes converted images to be written to the source folder instead of the destination. You can use this in conjunction with the REPLACE switch to convert an image "in-place".

•	NOENLARGE/S: This option prevents images from being enlarged if the resize operation would otherwise cause this.

•	NOREDUCE/S: This option prevents images from being reduced if the resize operation would otherwise cause this.

•	PRESERVEASPECTRATIO/S: When resizing images, use this switch to preserve the original aspect ratio of the source images. The output width or height will automatically be adjusted to ensure the aspect ratio is maintained.

•	PRESERVEDATE/S: When converting images "in place" (writing over the originals), this option preserves the last modified timestamp of the files instead of updating it to the current time and date.

•	QUALITY/K/N: Use this to specify the output quality when converting to JPEG image format.

•	REPLACE/S: This switch causes existing files to be automatically replaced by the converted image. You can use this in conjunction with the HERE switch to convert an image "in-place".

•	ROTATE/K: The ROTATE parameter lets you rotate images as part of the conversion process. Any angle from 1 to 359 can be specified as a parameter for this command. You can also specify ROTATE=EXIF to use the rotation information stored in the EXIF tags of an image.

•	TO/K: Use this to specify an alternative output path (by default the destination folder is used)

•	WIDTH/K/N: Use this to specify the new width of the converted image


Join

The Join command lets you join together multiple files into a single larger file. It is mainly used when you have a file that has been split into multiple parts, say for transmission via email, and you wish to recombine the parts. When used with no options, this command displays the Join dialog and automatically adds the names of all selected files in the active Lister to the join list.

The command template is:

FROM/M, TO/K

•	FROM/M: This option lets you specify the files to join. You can specify as many filenames as you like.

•	TO/K: This option lets you specify the name of the output file.


Marker

The Marker command is a dynamic command that lets Directory Opus display Toolbar buttons and menu items that are added dynamically by third-party namespace extensions. For example, an FTP namespace extension may add buttons to the Toolbar to switch between ASCII and Binary transfer modes.

Windows Explorer allows a third-party namespace extension to totally replace the Toolbar and menu contents. However, Directory Opus gives full control to the user over the state of the Toolbars, and therefore the Marker commands are necessary to gain access to these dynamically added functions.

The Marker command is a placeholder that tells Directory Opus where to insert the appropriate namespace-added functions. The command template for this command is:

ID/K/N,MENU/K,TOOLBAR/S

•	ID/K/N: This option lets you send a Namespace-specific command direct to the Namespace folder currently displayed in the active Lister. You need to know the exact command ID that the Namespace uses – ordinarily you will never use this option directly.

•	MENU/K: If this option is specified, the command marks the spot where Namespace-specific menu items will be displayed. You must specify the name of the menu in question from the following choices: File, Edit, View, Tools, Help, Other and All.

•	TOOLBAR/S: If this option is specified, the command marks the spot where Namespace-specific buttons added to the standard Toolbar will be displayed.


Play

This command uses the built-in sound player to play all selected sound files in the active Lister. The built-in sound player is a simple utility designed to play a sound quickly without the possible overhead of loading an external player. It supports WAV format sounds as well as any other sound files for which there is a system codec installed. Also see Predefined Commands.

The command template is:

FILE, QUIET/S

•	FILE: Use this to specify the name of the file to play

•	QUIET/S: Plays the specified sound without displaying the Play dialog.


Prefs

The Prefs command lets you access the Directory Opus configuration system. When used without any options, this command opens the Preferences editor. The command template for this command is:

ADDBACKGROUND/S, ADDFTPSITE/S, CUSTOMIZE/O, EXPORT/S, EXPORTDESC/K, EXPORTSETTINGS/O[<default>, all, filetypes, filters, images, toolbars, alltoolbars, prefs, noftppass, sounds, quiet], FILETYPES/S, FTPSITES/S, IMPORT/O, IMPORTEXPORT/S, IMPORTFLAGS/K[<all>, toolbars, formats, ftp, hotkeys, layouts, misc, faves, sounds, commands, quiet], IMPORTLIST/S, IMPORTSETTINGS/O[<all>, filetypes, replacefiletypes, filters, replacefilters, images, replaceimages, toolbars, replacetoolbars, prefs, sounds, replacesounds, replaceall, quiet], IMPORTSETTINGSLIST/S, KEYS/S, LAYOUT/K, LAYOUTCLOSELISTERS/O[<default>, yes, no], LAYOUTEDIT/S, LAYOUTLIST/S, LAYOUTNAME/K, LAYOUTSAVE/O[<all>, single], LAYOUTTHISLISTER/O[<default>, size, pos, paths], PAGE/K, PASSWORD/K, SETDEFAULTLISTER/S, SHOWICONS/S, STYLE/K, STYLEEDIT/S, STYLELIST/S, STYLESAVE/O, THEMES/S, TO/K, TOOLBARS/S, VFSPLUGINABOUT/K, VFSPLUGINCONFIG/K, VFSPLUGINDISABLE/K[<toggle>, enable, disable], VFSPLUGINLIST/S, VFSPLUGINMANAGER/S

•	ADDBACKGROUND/S: This option causes all selected files to be added to the Defined Images list in the Images / Backgrounds section of Preferences. It is designed to be used in the context menu for image files.

•	ADDFTPSITE/S: This option adds the currently connected FTP site to the FTP Address Book.

•	CUSTOMIZE/S: This option opens the Customize window to configure your Toolbars and menus.

•	EXPORTDESC/K: When exporting Settings using the EXPORTSETTINGS switch, this option lets you assign a description to the exported file.

•	EXPORTSETTINGS/O:  This argument lets you automate the export of settings files. The options for this argument let you control what items are exported. You can specify a filename using the TO parameter, otherwise you will be prompted for a name.

•	FILETYPE/S: This option opens the File Type Editor to configure your file type associations.

•	FTPSITE/S: This option opens the Preferences editor and displays the FTP section.

•	IMPORT/O: This option is used to import a previously exported set of Preferences. If you do not specify the name of a Preferences file as the value of the IMPORT option, you will be asked to select one.

•	IMPORTEXPORT/S: The Prefs IMPORTEXPORT command is used to access the Settings Export & Import function. This function lets you export and import full Directory Opus configuration sets, including all toolbars, menus, hotkeys, file types, sounds, images and more.

•	IMPORTFLAGS/K[<all>, toolbars, formats, ftp, hotkeys, layouts, misc, faves, sounds,  commands, quiet]: This option can be used to modify the behavior of the IMPORT option. It lets you specify the Preferences sections that are imported from the exported file. By default, all Preferences sections are imported. For example, Prefs IMPORT=Colorful IMPORTFLAGS=toolbars,misc,sounds would import only the Toolbars, Miscellaneous and Sounds sections of the Preferences file. You can also add the quiet option which causes the Preferences to be imported without displaying any of the usual confirmation messages.

•	IMPORTLIST/S: This option acts as a dynamic command and generates a list of your exported Preferences files. Selecting an item from this list will import the specified set of Preferences. You can use the IMPORTFLAGS option in conjunction with IMPORTLIST to control which Preferences sections are affected.

•	IMPORTSETTINGS/O: This option can be combined with the IMPORT parameter to automate the import of exported settings files. The arguments for IMPORTSETTINGS let you control which settings items are imported – you can also use the IMPORTFLAGS argument to fine-tune the Preferences options that are imported.

•	IMPORTSETTINGSLIST/S: This parameter generates a list of exported settings files (similar to the IMPORTLIST argument).

•	KEY/S: This option opens the Customize – Keys section of Customize.

•	LAYOUT/K: This option lets you load a predefined Lister Layout. The name of the Layout to load must be given as the value of this option, for example Prefs LAYOUT=DualLister

•	LAYOUTCLOSELISTERS/O[<default>,yes,no]: This option is used in conjunction with the LAYOUT option and lets you control whether existing Listers are closed or left open when you load a new Lister Layout.

•	LAYOUTEDIT/S: This option opens the Preferences editor and displays the Layouts section automatically.

•	LAYOUTLIST/S: The Prefs LAYOUTLIST command is a dynamic command that generates a list of your predefined Lister Layouts. You can also use the LAYOUTCLOSELISTERS option in conjunction with this command to control whether or not existing Listers are closed when a new Layout is chosen from the generated list.

•	LAYOUTNAME/K: Use this parameter in conjunction with the LAYOUTSAVE argument to specify a name when saving a Lister Layout. If a name is not specified Opus will prompt you for the name to use.

•	LAYOUTSAVE/O: This parameter lets you save the current set of Listers as a new Lister Layout. You can use the LAYOUTNAME parameter to specify a name to use, otherwise Opus will prompt you for a Layout name. If you specify LAYOUTSAVE=single then only the current Lister will be saved in the Layout, rather than all currently open Listers.

•	LAYOUTTHISLISTER/O: In conjunction with the LAYOUT parameter this command lets you apply the settings from a saved Lister Layout to the active Lister, rather than opening a new Lister. By default all settings from the saved Layout are applied, but you can specify additional options to control which settings are used from the saved Layout. Specifying size causes only the size of the saved Lister to be used, pos will only use the position of the saved Lister, and paths will only read the paths from the saved Lister. These options can be combined as desired.

•	PAGE/K: This command is a shortcut to opening the Preferences dialog to go to a specify section and page. Valid sections are display, settings, config, fileops, logging, faves, zip, sounds, misc, ftp, doubleclick, toolbars, startup, folders and plugins. You can also specify a page by tab number (counting from 0 as the left-most tab in each section). For example, Prefs PAGE display,1 would display the second tab in the Display section.

•	PASSWORD/K: Use this argument to place a password on a settings file exported with the EXPORTSETTINGS command.

•	SETDEFAULTLISTER/S: The Prefs SETDEFAULTLISTER command is used to set the default Lister settings from the currently active Lister. The Default Lister settings are used whenever a new Lister is opened (without using a Layout) and depends on the options in Preferences.

•	SHOWICONS/S: This switch causes icons to be displayed for the lists generated by the IMPORTLIST, LAYOUTLIST, STYLELIST and VFSPLUGINLIST options.

•	STYLE/K: Use this parameter to apply a specified Lister Style to the current Lister. For example, Prefs STYLE=Filmstrip would set the current Lister into Filmstrip mode (using the configured settings for the Filmstrip Style).

•	STYLEEDIT/S: This command opens the Preferences dialog and displays the Lister Styles page.

•	STYLELIST/S: This switch acts as a dynamic command to generate a list of your configured Lister Styles. Selecting a Style from this list will automatically apply it to the current Lister.

•	STYLESAVE/O: This parameter lets you save the configuration of the current Lister as a new Lister Style. If no name is specified, Opus will prompt you for the name of the new Style.

•	THEMES/S: Displays the Lister Themes dialog to let you save and load Lister Themes

•	TO/K: Use this argument in cojunction with the EXPORTSETTINGS parameter to specify a filename to export your settings to.

•	TOOLBAR/S: This option opens the Customize - Toolbars section of Customize.

•	VFSPLUGINABOUT/K: This parameter displays the About dialog for the specified VFS Plugin.

•	VFSPLUGINCONFIG/K: This parameter displays the Configuration dialog for the specified VFS Plugin.

•	VFSPLUGINDISABLE/K: This parameter lets you enable or disable the specified VFS Plugin. With no options it toggles the current state of the plugin, otherwise you can specify enable or disable to control the state.

•	VFSPLUGINLIST/S: This option acts as a dynamic command to generate a list of your installed VFS Plugins.

•	VFSPLUGINMANAGER/S: Displays the Preferences dialog opened to the VFS Plugins page


Print

This command lets you print files and folders. When used without any options, it prints all currently selected files in the active Lister. Directory Opus can natively print only the picture formats that it understands (JPEG, GIF, ILBM, etc). However, using system-defined print handlers it can print many other types of files. For example, when you select a text file and choose the Print command, the system-defined print handler, which is set by default to Notepad, is automatically invoked to print the selected file.

Under Windows XP, running the Print command with no files selected, or with only graphics files selected, will invoke the system Photo Printing Wizard.

The command template for this command is:

DEFAULTLIST/S,FOLDER/O[<all>,selected],SETDEFAULT/K,TO/K:

•	DEFAULTLIST/S: This acts as a dynamic command to generate buttons for each of the printers that are installed on the system. Clicking one of the buttons sets that printer as the default. You can also drop documents on the printer buttons to print files directly to a given printer.

•	FOLDER/O[<all>, selected]: When you specify the FOLDER option, the Print command initiates the Print Folder function which lets you print folder listings to the printer or to a disk file. The default behavior is to print all files in the current folder in the active Lister, however if you set the value of the FOLDER option to selected, only the selected files in the current folder are printed.

•	SETDEFAULT/K: This option can be used to change the default printer. Specify the name of the printer as it appears in the Printers Control Panel (make sure you enclose the name in quotation marks if it contains spaces)

•	TO/K: Use this option to specify the printer to print selected files to, overriding the default printer setting. Specify the name of the printer as it appears in the Printers Control Panel (make sure you enclose the name in quotation marks if it contains spaces). A Print button with the TO option specified can also have documents dropped on it to print the files to the specified printer.


Properties

The Properties command lets you access the system Properties dialogs for files and folders. When used with no options, it displays the Properties dialog for all selected files and folders (if more than one file is selected, a special combined Properties dialog is shown). The command template for this command is:

FILE, FOLDEROPTIONS/S, FORMATLIST/S, FTPSITE/S, LISTER/S, NOFROMFOCUS/S, ROTATE/K[0, 90, 180, 270, menu], SETWALLPAPER/O[<default>, center, tile, stretch, menu], SINGLE/S

•	FILE: This lets you specify the name of the file and display the Properties dialog.

•	FOLDEROPTIONS/O: This option displays the Folder Options for the current folder. This option can take an optional value which is a number from 0 to 3 representing the initial page in the Folder Options editor to display.

•	FORMATLIST/S: This option acts as a dynamic command that generates a list of Defined Folder Formats. You can configure these with the Folder Options function. If you select a format from this list, the current folder will be automatically redisplayed using those settings.

•	FTPSITE/S: This option displays the Site Properties dialog for the currently connected FTP site.

•	LISTER/S: This option displays the system Properties dialog for the folder currently displayed in the active Lister.

•	NOFROMFOCUS/S: This switch replaces the old FROMFOCUS option; the default behavior for this command is now to operate on either the source file display or the tree, whichever has input focus. You can disable this and return to the previous behavior of only operating on the file display with the NOFROMFOCUS switch.

•	ROTATE/K: This option is used to rotate the display of thumbnails in the active Lister. The value is a number from 0 to 359 and represents the number of degrees to rotate the selected thumbnails. The files themselves are not modified – it is only the thumbnail display that is affected.

This option can also take the string menu as a value. If this is specified, it acts as a dynamic command and adds a Rotate submenu if any thumbnails are displayed. This is used on the default file context menu – if there are no thumbnails selected the Rotate option is hidden.

•	SETWALLPAPER/O: This option sets the selected image file as the system Desktop Wallpaper image. Any image file format that Directory Opus supports can be used with this command. You can specify the optional center, tile or stretch parameters to specify the wallpaper settings. Specifying menu as the value of this option produces a pop-up menu with Center, Tile and Stretch options displayed. This is most useful in context menus; for example, add the following command to the context menu for Recognized Images:

Properties SETWALLPAPER=menu

•	SINGLE/S: The SINGLE option modifies the default behavior of the Properties command. Normally when multiple files are selected, a single combined Properties dialog is shown for all files. However, if the SINGLE option is specified, a separate Properties dialog will be displayed for each selected file or folder.


Recent

This command is used to display and control the global list of recently visited folders. When used with no options it acts as a dynamic command that generates a list of recent folders. Selecting one of the folders in this list will read that folder into the active Lister. The command template for this command is:

CLEAR/S, NEW/S, NEWTAB/O[<normal>, nofocus], OPENINDEST/S, OPENINDUAL/S, OPENINLEFT/S, OPENINRIGHT/S, PATH, SHOWICONS/S

•	CLEAR/S: This option clears the Recent folder list.

•	NEW/S: This switch modifies the behavior of the Recent command when it is acting as a dynamic command. It causes a new Lister to be opened when the user selects a folder from the Recent List, rather than opening the folder in the current Lister.

•	NEWTAB/S: This switch causes a new Folder Tab to be opened when the user selects a folder from the Recent list.

•	OPENINDEST/S: This switch is similar to the NEW option, except that it causes the folder to be read into the destination file display of a dual-file display Lister. The Lister is automatically set into dual-file display mode if it is not already. If combined with the NEWTAB option the new Folder Tab will be opened in the destination window.

•	OPENINDUAL/S: Opens the folder in the opposite file display of a dual-file display Lister.

•	OPENINLEFT/S: Opens the folder in the left-hand file display of a dual display Lister.

•	OPENINRIGHT/S: Opens the folder in the right-hand file display of a dual display Lister.

•	PATH: This option modifies the default behavior of the Recent command and acts as a filter to control the Recent folders displayed in the generated list. For example, Recent C: would display only those Recent folders beginning with C:.

•	SHOWICONS/S: The SHOWICONS switch modifies the behavior of the Recent command when it is acting as a dynamic command. It causes icons to be displayed in the generated list of Recent folders. Without this switch, only the folder names are shown.


Rename

This command is used to change the names of selected files and folders. When used with no options it displays a dialog prompting for a new name for each file in turn. You can use wildcards and regular expression syntax to perform batch renames. The command template for this command is:

ADVANCED/S, AUTORENAME/S, BY/K/N, CASE/K[upper, lower, firstword, allwords, extupper, extlower], FINDREP/O[<on>, ext], FROM, INLINE/O[<default>, all, name, ext, home, end], MATCHCASE/S, NUMBER/O, PATTERN/K, PRESET/K, RECURSE/S, REGEXP/S, SIMPLE/S, TO, TYPE/K[files, dirs]

•	ADVANCED/S: This switch causes the Rename dialog to open in advanced mode. If you do not specify the mode the dialog opens in the mode that was last used.

•	AUTORENAME/S: If this flag is set, and the new name of a file clashes with an existing file, the new filename is automatically modified (by adding an incrementing number to the end) to make it unique.

•	BY/K/N: When using the NUMBER option this parameter is used to specify the increment for auto-numbering. For example, Rename NUMBER BY 2 will number each file incrementing by 2.

•	CASE/K: This option controls the case modification process. Use one of the supported keywords to modify the capitalization of all selected files and folders.

•	FINDREP/O: This parameter supports the ext option to specify that find and replace affects the filename extension as well as the filename stem.

•	FINDREP/S: Set this option to specify find-and-replace renaming. It is only used in conjunction with the PATTERN option.

•	FROM: This option lets you specify the name of the file to rename. If not specified, the selected files and folders in the active Lister are used. You can specify a standard wildcard pattern for this, but regular expression or find-and-replace patterns must be given with the PATTERN argument.

•	INLINE/O: This option triggers inline rename mode in the active Lister. If no value is given for this option, the item in the Lister with focus will be set into rename mode. Alternatively, you can specify the name of the item in the current Lister to begin inline rename on.

This command takes optional parameters to automatically select part of the old filename to be renamed. Specify name to only select the filename stem, and ext to only select the filename extension. Specify all to select the entire filename. Specify home to position the cursor at the beginning of the name, and end to position it at the end (without selecting any text).

•	MATCHCASE/S: Specify this option to make the Rename operation case sensitive.

•	NUMBER/O: Use this to automatically number files. By default, numbering commences at 1, however you can change the starting number by specifying it with this parameter. You can also control "zero padding" by prefixing the start number with the desired number of zeroes. For example, Rename NUMBER 0010 would start numbering at 10, padding all numbers to four digits.

•	PATTERN: This option lets you specify the wildcard pattern to be used for the rename. Use this if you are performing a regular expression or find-and-replace rename.

•	PRESET/K: This parameter can be specified to automatically invoke a Rename operation using a pre-saved preset. You can also specify PRESET=regexp and PRESET=findrep to start the Rename dialog up in regular expression or find & replace mode automatically.

•	RECURSE/S: This option lets you make the rename operation recursive. In this mode, all files in all selected sub-folders will have the same wildcard/case modification rename performed on them.

•	REGEXP/S: Set this option to specify regular expression syntax when renaming. It is only used in conjunction with the PATTERN option.

•	SIMPLE/S: This switch causes the Rename dialog to open in simple mode. If you do not specify the mode the dialog opens in the mode that was last used.

•	TO: This option lets you specify the new name of the file being renamed. It is only used in conjunction with the FROM and/or PATTERN options.

•	TYPE/K: You can use this argument to control the items that will be renamed in a wildcard rename. Specify TYPE=files to only rename files, or TYPE=dirs to only rename folders.

Rename inside ZIP files: Directory Opus allows you to rename files within ZIP files as normal. However, the ZIP file format does not natively support rename, so Opus implements this "behind the scenes" by extracting the file to a temporary location, renaming it and then adding it back to the ZIP file. Depending on the size of the file that you are renaming, this may be fairly slow. It is not possible to rename sub-folders within ZIP files.


Select

This command is used to select and deselect files and folders in the active Lister. When used by itself with no options, it displays the file selection dialog (in either simple or advanced mode, depending on how it was last used). The command template for this command is:

ADVANCED/S, ALL/S, ALLDIRS/S, ALLFILES/S, DESELECT/S, DESELECTNOMATCH/S, DESTTOSOURCE/S, FILTER/S, FILTERFLAGS/K[select, deselect, hide, hidenomatch], FIRST/S, HIDESEL/S, HIDEUNSEL/S, INVERT/S, MAKEVISIBLE/S, NEXT/S, NONE/S, NOPATTERN/S, PATTERN, PREV/S, RESELECT/S,SHOWHIDDEN/S, SIMPLE/S, SOURCETODEST/S, TYPE/K[files, dirs]

•	ADVANCED/S: This option displays the file selection dialog in advanced mode.

•	ALL/S: The ALL option selects all files and folders in the active Lister.

•	ALLDIRS/S: This option selects all folders (but not files) in the active Lister.

•	ALLFILES/S: The ALLFILES option selects all files (but not folders) in the active Lister.

•	DESELECT/S: This option is used in conjunction with the PATTERN option. Any files matching the wildcard are deselected instead of being selected.

•	DESELECT/S: This switch now works in conjunction with ALLFILES and ALLDIRS – combining it with these options lets you deselect all files or all folders.

•	DESELECTNOMATCH/S: This flag can be specified with other parameters to cause files that don’t match the wildcard pattern to be deselected. Normally files that don’t match the pattern are left unchanged.

•	DESTTOSOURCE/S: The Select DESTTOSOURCE command will select all files in the source Lister that are currently selected in the destination Lister. Only the names of the files are used in determining which files are present in both Listers.

•	FILTER/S: This option performs file selection based on a previously saved filter. The name of the filter must be specified as the value of the PATTERN option. For example, Select MyFilter FILTER.

•	FILTERFLAGS/K: Use this in conjunction with the FILTER parameter to specify the behavior when selecting with a predefined filter. By default, matching files are selected and non-matching files are left unchanged. Options for this are deselect (deselect matching files), hide (hide matching files) and hidenomatch (hide non-matching files).

•	FIRST/S: This switch selects the first file in the source Lister and deselects all others.

•	HIDESEL/S: This option causes all files selected by the Select command to be hidden (removed from the Lister display). You can use this in conjunction with the PATTERN option to perform a wildcard selection at the same time, or with the NOPATTERN option to simply hide all currently selected files.

•	HIDEUNSEL/S: This option is similar to the HIDESEL option, except that files that are not selected are hidden.

•	INVERT/S: This option inverts the current selection status of all files and folders in the active Lister.

•	MAKEVISIBLE/S: Use this switch with other Select parameters to ensure that the first file matching the pattern is visible in the Lister. The Lister will automatically scroll if needed.

•	NEXT/S: Selects the next item in the Lister (the item immediately following the first currently selected item).

•	NONE/S: This option deselects all files and folders in the active Lister.

•	NOPATTERN/S: This option is used in conjunction with the HIDESEL and HIDEUNSEL options. It lets you hide files without having to perform a pattern match at the same time.

•	PATTERN: Use this option to select files based on a wildcard pattern without displaying the file selection dialog. For example, Select *.gif would automatically select all files ending in .gif in the active Lister.

•	PREV/S: Selects the previous item in the Lister (the item immediately preceding the last currently selected item).

•	RESELECT/S: This option reselects all files and folders that were deselected by the execution of the previous command.

•	SHOWHIDDEN/S: This option reveals any files in the Lister that have previously been hidden with the HIDESEL or HIDEUNSEL options.

•	SIMPLE/S: This option displays the file selection dialog in simple mode.

•	SOURCETODEST/S: Similar to the DESTTOSOURCE command, this selects all files in the destination Lister that are currently selected in the source Lister.

•	TYPE/K: Use this parameter to control which objects are affected by the Select command. Specify TYPE=files to only select files, or TYPE=dirs to only select folders.


Set

The Set command is used to dynamically modify several settings, for both the active Lister and the program as a whole. The function does nothing when no options are specified. The command template for this command is:

AUTOSIZECOLUMNS/S, CHECKBOXMODE/K[On, Off, Toggle], COLUMNS/K, COLUMNSADD/K, COLUMNSREMOVE/O, COLUMNSTOGGLE/K, CONTENTFORMAT/K, COPYFILTER/K[On, Off, Toggle], DELFILTER/K[On, Off, Toggle], DUAL/K[On, Off, Toggle, Horiz, Vert, ToggleLayout, Source, Dest], FILTERS/K[On, Off, Toggle], FLATVIEW/K[On, Off, Toggle, Grouped, Mixed, MixedNoFolders], FORMAT/K, FORMATLOCK/K[On, Off, Toggle], FTPMODE/K[ASCII, Binary, Auto], HIDE/S, HIDEFILTERATTR/O, HIDEFILTERFILENAME/O, HIDEFILTERFOLDERS/O, HIDESYSTEMFILES/K[On, Off, Toggle], LAYOUT/K[Remember, Restore], LISTERCMD/K[Minimize, Maximize, Restore, ShowAll, MinimizeAll, TileH, TileV, Cascade], LISTERSIZE/K, OUTPUT/K[On, Off, Toggle, Find, Undo, Log, Test, FTP1, FTP2, Email], READONLY/K[On, Off, Toggle], SHOWFILTERATTR/O, SHOWFILTERFILENAME/O, SHOWFILTERFOLDERS/O, SORTBY/K, SORTGROUPDUPES/K[On, Off, Toggle], SORTNUMERIC/K[On, Off, Toggle], SORTORDER/K[Folders, Files, Mixed, Cycle], SORTREVERSE/K[On, Off, Toggle], SORTWORDS/K[On, Off, Toggle], SOUNDS/K[On, Off, Toggle], STATE/K[Source, Dest, LockOff], STATUSBAR/K[On, Off, Toggle], TREE/K[On, Off, Toggle, Left, Right, Dual], UTILITY/K[Find, Sync, Dupe, On, Off, Toggle, Horiz, Vert, ToggleLayout], VIEW/K[LargeIcons, SmallIcons, List, Details, Power, Thumbnails, Cycle], VIEWPANE/K[On, Off, Toggle, Horiz, Vert, ToggleLayout], VIEWPANESIZE/K, WINMSGR/K[On, Off, Toggle]

•	AUTOSIZECOLUMNS/S: This command automatically resizes all displayed columns in a details or Power mode Lister. It is the equivalent of double-clicking on the separator bars between each of the column headers.

•	CHECKBOXMODE/K: This parameter is used to toggle or turn Check-box Mode on or off in the current Lister.

•	COLUMNS/K: This lets you change the information fields that are displayed in Power/Details mode in the current Lister. You can specify multiple column keywords separated by commas. This option replaces all current columns with those that you specify. See below for a list of the column keywords.

•	COLUMNSADD/K: This lets you add information fields to the current Lister. You can specify multiple column keywords separated by commas. The fields you specify will be added after any existing fields. By default the fields are added to the end of the current display, however you can specify the position of each field by appending (x) to the column keyword, where x is the desired position. E.g., Set COLUMNSADD=dest(3)

•	COLUMNSREMOVE/K: This lets you remove information fields from the current Lister. If the fields you specify are currently displayed in the Lister, they will be removed.

•	COLUMNSTOGGLE/K: This lets you turn the specified columns on and off in the current Lister. If the columns that you specify are all currently displayed, they will be removed. Otherwise, any specified columns that are not currently displayed will be added to the Lister. The column keywords can optionally be followed by a position setting in the same manner as COLUMNSADD.

•	CONTENTFORMAT/K: Use this to set the current Lister to use the named content type format. For example, Set CONTENTFORMAT=Images.

•	COPYFILTER/K [On, Off, Toggle]: This option is used to control the state of the Copy Filter. Using this command can be easier than modifying this option through Preferences.

•	DELFILTER/K [On, Off, Toggle]: This option is used to control the state of the Delete Filter.

•	DUAL/K [On, Off, Toggle, Horiz, Vert, ToggleLayout]: This option is used to change the active Lister between single- and dual-file display modes. On, Off, and Toggle are used to switch between single and dual modes. The Horiz, Vert and ToggleLayout options are used to switch the dual-file display mode between horizontal and vertical layout.

The DUAL argument has additional options to control the state of the newly opened file-display. Set DUAL=source forces the second display to open as the source, and Set DUAL=dest forces it to open as the destination.

•	FILESFROMDROPONLY/S: If you add the command Set FILESFROMDROPONLY to a button that launches an external program and uses %1 or {f} or similar to pass filenames to that program, it will prevent the function from picking up selected files from the source Lister. Instead, drag and drop will be the only way to pass files to that function.

•	FILTERS/K [On, Off, Toggle]: This option is used to control the state of both the Copy and Delete Filters.

•	FLATVIEW/K: Use this command to turn Flat View Mode on or off. You can toggle the current state of Flat View mode with the toggle option, or specify the state with on or off. You can also specify the Flat View type using grouped, mixed or mixednofolders. For example, Set FLATVIEW=grouped would toggle Flat View Grouped mode on or off.

•	FORMAT/K: This option is used to change the display of the current Lister to use a previously Defined Path Format. These can be configured through the Folder Options function.

•	FORMATLOCK/K: This can replace the format lock (padlock) in the default status bar. If you wish to move this functionality to a toolbar or menu (if, for instance, you have turned your status bar off), then you can use the Set FORMATLOCK command to do it.

•	FTPMODE/K[ASCII, Binary, Auto]: This lets you change the transfer mode for the current FTP connection. You can choose from ASCII, Binary and Auto modes.

•	HIDE/S: This switch is used in conjunction with other Set parameters – it does nothing on its own. It causes Directory Opus to hide from the Toolbar any button that ordinarily would be disabled because the function was not available. For example, HIDE in conjunction with the FTPMODE option would cause the button to be removed from the display when not in an FTP folder.

Normally when a Set command is not available for the current Lister, it is disabled. For example, File Collections do not support Flat View, so when you are browsing a File Collection the Flat View option would be disabled. If the HIDE switch is also specified for the Set command, unavailable options are hidden instead of disabled.

•	HIDEFILTERATTR/O: This modifies the Hide Filter – Attributes setting for the current Lister.

•	HIDEFILTERFILENAME/O: This modifies the Hide Filter – Filename setting for the current Lister.

•	HIDEFILTERFOLDERS/O: This modifies the Hide Filter – Folders setting for the current Lister.

•	HIDESYSTEMFILES/K: Use this command to select the state of the Hide protected operating system files option in Preferences.

•	LAYOUT/K[Remember, Restore, Filmstrip]: With the remember parameter, this option causes the Lister to store its current "layout". Layout in this instance refers to the appearance of the Lister itself (tree state and size, file display state and size, viewer pane state and size) and should not be confused with the Lister Layouts system.

If you have previously remembered the Lister layout with the set layout=remember command, you can use the restore command to automatically return the Lister to that arrangement. For example, you could have a button that called remember and then used other SET command parameters to turn the tree off, put the Lister into dual file display mode, etc. You could then have another button that called restore to instantly return the Lister to its prior appearance.

The filmstrip parameter toggles Filmstrip mode on or off. You can also use set layout="filmstrip=on" to turn the mode on and set layout="filmstrip=off" to turn the mode off rather than toggling (make sure you include the quotation marks in these cases).

•	LISTERCMD/K [Minimize, Maximize, Restore, ShowAll, MinimizeAll, TileH, TileV, Cascade]: This option is used to perform a Lister management command. Minimize, Maximize and Restore let you modify the window state of the active Lister. ShowAll makes all open Listers display themselves if they are minimized or behind another window. MinimizeAll causes all open Listers to be minimized. TileH, TileV and Cascade are used to automatically arrange open Listers on the screen.

•	LISTERSIZE/K: This command lets you change the physical size of the current Lister. It takes one or two parameters, being the width and height, separated by commas. If you only want to change one dimension, do not supply the other one. You can also change the size incrementally by specifying delta values using + or -.

•	OUTPUT/K: The Set OUTPUT command now you specify the page in the Output Window to display. Valid pages are find, undo, log, test, ftp1, ftp2 and email. If you do not specify the page the Output Window opens displaying the last page that was used.

•	READONLY/K[On, Off, Toggle]: This lets you set the read only state of the current ZIP file.

•	SHOWFILTERATTR/O: This modifies the Show Filter – Attributes setting for the current Lister.

•	SHOWFILTERFILENAME/O: This modifies the Show Filter – Filename setting for the current Lister.

•	SHOWFILTERFOLDERS/O: This modifies the Show Filter – Folders setting for the current Lister.

•	SORTBY/K: This option lets you change the sort field for the current Lister. You must specify the column keyboard representing the field you wish to sort on. You can also specify sortlist, which acts as a dynamic command that generates a list of the current fields displayed in the Lister, letting you easily change the current sort order.

•	SORTGROUPDUPES/K: This command lets you change the state of the Group duplicates option for the current folder. This is only used in the Duplicate File Finder results file collection.

•	SORTNUMERIC/K[On, Off, Toggle]: This lets you change the state of the Numeric name head sorting option for the current Lister.

•	SORTNUMERICTAIL/K[On, Off, Toggle]: This lets you change the state of the Numeric name tail sorting option for the current Lister.

•	SORTORDER/K[Folders, Files, Mixed, Cycle]: Changes the sort order in the current Lister. Choose from Folders (folders listed first), Files (files listed first) and Mixed (folders and files intermixed). You can also specify Cycle to cycle through the available modes.

•	SORTREVERSE/K[On, Off, Toggle]: This lets you change the state of the Reverse order sorting option for the current Lister.

•	SORTWORDS/K[On, Off, Toggle]: Changes the state of the Word sort sorting option for the current Lister.

•	SOUNDS/K[On, Off, Toggle]: This lets you turn Directory Opus sound effects on or off.

•	STATE/K[Source, Dest, LockOff]: This option is used to change the current state of the active Lister. You must specify either Source or Dest as the value of this option.

Listers can be locked in an "off" state. If locked off, clicking in them will not set them to the source or destination – only another Set STATE command can unlock them. Use Set STATE=lockoff to lock Listers off.

•	STATUSBAR/K: This command lets you turn on or off the Lister status bar.

•	TREE/K[On, Off, Toggle, Left, Right, Dual]: This option is used to turn the Folder Tree in the active Lister on or off. It is possible to control the left and right Folder Trees individually. Options are left, right and dual. For example, Set TREE=toggle,right would toggle the right-hand Folder Tree on or off.

•	UTILITY/K: Use the Set UTILITY command to open or close the Lister Utility Panel. Use the toggle keyword to toggle the current state, or the keywords on and off to specify the desired state. You can also choose which tab of the Utility Panel is displayed using the keywords find, sync and dupe. The layout of the Utility Panel can be selected with the keywords horiz and vert, and you can use togglelayout to toggle the current layout.

•	VIEW/K [LargeIcons, SmallIcons, List, Details, Power, Thumbnails, Tiles, Cycle]: This option is used to change the current display mode of the active Lister. You must specify one of the available modes as the value of this option. You can also use the Cycle option to cycle through the available display modes. The Tiles option is only available under Windows XP, and currently only works in system virtual folders like the Desktop.

•	VIEWPANE/K[On, Off, Toggle, Horiz, Vert, ToggleLayout]: This command lets you control the Lister Viewer Pane. You can turn it on or off or toggle its state. You can also modify its layout – either horizontal or vertical.

•	VIEWPANESIZE/K: This lets you change the size of the Viewer Pane in the current Lister. The value given is a percentage of the total size of the Lister. You can specify two sizes separated by a comma, in which case this command will toggle the Viewer Pane between the two sizes. For example, SET VIEWPANESIZE=50,25 would toggle the Viewer Pane between 50% of the Lister width and 25% of the Lister width (or height if the Viewer Pane was set to horizontal layout).

•	WINMSGR/K: This command lets you open or close the Lister Contacts List. Use the keyboard toggle to toggle the current state of the Contacts List, or the keywords on or off to specify its state.

The Set command lets you string multiple switches together to change more than one thing at once. For example,

Set COLUMNSADD=name,size SORTBY=size SORTREVERSE=on

The COLUMNS and SORTFIELD switches for Set all use column keywords to refer to the Lister information fields. These are the columns that are also available in Folder Options. The keywords that are recognized are shown in the following table:-

Category	Column	Keyword
Document	Author	author
	Category	category
	Comments	comments
	Pages	pages
	Subject	subject
	Title	title
General	Age (relative)	daterel
	Attributes	attr
	Date (accessed)	accesseddate
	Date (created)	createddate
	Date (modified)	modifieddate
	Date/time (accessed)	accessed
	Date/time (created)	created
	Date/time (modified)	modified
	Description	desc
	Extension	ext
	MD5 checksum	md5sum
	Owner	owner
	Size (auto)	sizeauto
	Size (bytes)	size
	Size (KB)	sizekb
	Size (relative)	sizerel
	Time (accessed)	accessedtime
	Time (created)	createdtime
	Time (modified)	modifiedtime
	Type	type
Image	Aperture value	apertureval
	Bit depth	picdepth
	Camera make	cameramake
	Camera model	cameramodel
	Dimensions	picsize
	Exposure bias	exposurebias
	Exposure program	exposureprogram
	Exposure time	exposuretime
	Flash	flash
	F-Number	fnumber
	Focal length	focallength
	Height	picheight
	Resolution (X)	picresx
	Metering mode	meteringmode
	Resolution (Y)	picresy
	Sensitivity	isorating
	Shooting time	shootingtime
	Shutter speed	shutterspeed
	Subject distance	subjectdistance
	White balance	whitebalance
	Width	picwidth
Music	Album	mp3album
	Artist	mp3artist
	Bit rate	mp3bitrate
	Genre	mp3genre
	Mode	mp3mode
	Music comment	mp3comment
	Music info	mp3info
	Music title	mp3title
	Music type	mp3type
	Sample rate	mp3samplerate
	Song length	mp3songlength
	Track Number	mp3track
	Year	mp3year
Version	Company Name	companyname
	Copyright	copyright
	Module Description	moddesc
	Module Version	modversion
	Product Name	prodname
	Product Version	prodversion
The SORTFIELD switch also recognizes the following synonyms to set sort order (in the case where multiple display fields are sorted the same): modified, created, accessed, size, date.

• The MD5 Checksum column calculates and displays the MD5 checksum (hash value) of all files in the current folder. Because calculating the checksum may take a significant amount of time, it is disabled by default for files exceeding 5000kb in size. If you wish to increase this limit, set the following registry value to the desired limit in kilobytes (or set to 0 to have no limit at all):

HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\GPSoftware\Directory Opus\Config\User
 	(DWORD) MaxHashSize = <limit>


SetAttr

The SetAttr command lets you modify the attributes, timestamps and descriptions of all selected files and folders. The attributes you can modify are Read Only (file can not be deleted or modified), Archive (file is marked for backup), Hidden (file is not normally displayed) and System (file is a system file). You can also set the creation and last modified time to a specific date and time. The default behavior of this command if no options are specified is to display the Set Attributes dialog. However, you can automate the procedure by specifying options to define which attributes and timestamps to modify. The command template for this function is:

ATTR/K, CLEARATTR/K, CREATED/K, DESCRIPTION/O, FILTER/K, MODIFIED/K, RECURSE/S, SETATTR/K, TOGGLEATTR/K

•	ATTR/K: This option lets you specify absolute attributes to change selected files to. The value string can consist of the letters r (read only), a (archived), h (hidden), s (system) or n (normal). For example, SetAttr ATTR=hs would set all selected file attributes to hidden and system.

•	CLEARATTR/K: This option lets you specify attributes to turn off in selected files. Only the attributes specified will be turned off; other attributes will not be changed.

•	CREATED/K: This option lets you specify the date to set for the creation time for selected files.

•	DESCRIPTION/O: This option can be used to add your own descriptions to files and folders. When DESCRIPTION is given by itself, Opus displays a dialog letting you enter a description for selected files. You can also specify the description string as the value for this option, in which case no dialog is shown.

•	FILTER/K: This option lets you specify the name of a previously saved filter to use in conjunction with the RECURSE option.

•	MODIFIED/K: This option lets you specify the date to set for the last modified time for selected files. You can specify the value now which means the current time and date, or you can specify a specific date only. The date specified must be in the form YYYYMMDD, for example SetAttr MODIFIED=20010922

•	RECURSE/S: If you specify this option, the changes you have specified will be made recursively to all files within any selected subfolders.

•	SETATTR/K: This option lets you specify attributes to turn on in selected files. This has the effect of ‘adding’ attributes to those already set. It will not turn any existing attributes off.

•	TOGGLEATTR/K: This option lets you specify attributes to toggle on or off in selected files. The attributes you specify will be turned on if they are currently on, and vice versa.

•	TOGGLEATTR/K: Use this parameter to toggle the specified attributes of the selected files. Valid attributes are h (hidden), s (system), a (archived) and r (read-only). For example, to toggle the read-only flag for all selected files the command would be SetAttr TOGGLEATTR=r.


Show

This command uses the built-in picture viewer display all selected picture files in the active Lister. The built-in picture viewer is a simple utility designed to let you view a picture quickly without the possible overhead of loading an external viewer or editor. Directory Opus supports the common graphics formats of JPEG, GIF, TIF, PNG, ILBM, PSD, BMP, WMF and EMF as well as the Amiga Icon format (.info). Using the Viewer Plug-in system it is possible to extend the viewing capabilities to include other file types. The command template for this function is:

FILE/F, PLUGINLIST/S, PLUGINCONFIG/K, PLUGINABOUT/K, USEEXISTING/S, PLUGIN/K, PLUGINDISABLE/O[<toggle>,enable,disable], PLUGINMANAGER/S

•	FILE/F: This lets you specify the name of the file to view

•	PLUGINLIST/S: This option acts as a dynamic command to generate a drop-down list of the currently installed Viewer Plug-ins.

•	PLUGINCONFIG/K: This option will display the configuration dialog for the specified Viewer Plug-in (if supported).

•	PLUGINABOUT/K: This option will display the About information for the specified Viewer Plug-in (if supported).

•	USEEXISTING/S: If you specify this switch, Directory Opus will attempt to locate and use an existing picture viewer instead of opening a new one. For example, configure the dblclk action for the Recognized Images file type to Show USEEXISTING.

•	PLUGIN/S: This option forces Directory Opus to use the specified plug-in to view the show. You can use this to override the default plug-in for the type of file you are trying to view. For example, a button with the command Show PLUGIN=text would force the text viewer plug-in to be used. This lets you view as hex, for example, an image file that otherwise would have been displayed as a picture.

•	PLUGINDISABLE/O: Use this option in conjunction with the PLUGIN parameter to enable or disable a Viewer Plug-in.

•	PLUGINMANAGER/S: Displays the Viewer Plug-in Manager window, which lets you enable, disable, configure and rearrange the order of your installed plug-ins.

See the The Opus Picture Viewer for more information.


Split

This command is the companion to the Join command, and lets you split a single file into multiple, smaller parts. It also allows you to uuencode the split files for transmission via email. Split operates on the first selected file in the active Lister. You need to specify the output folder for the split files, as well as the chunk size. You can select from one of the predefined chunk sizes or enter your own chunk size in bytes. The split files automatically have a numerical prefix appended indicating their order. There are no options for this command.


Toolbar

The Toolbar command is used to provide access to your stored Toolbars without going through the Customize dialog. The command template is as follows:

CLOSE/S, IMPORT/S, LINE/K, LIST/S, LOCAL/S, NAME, POS/K, STATE/K[<top>, bottom, left, right, center, viewpane, tree, float], TOGGLE/S

•	CLOSE/S: Use this switch in conjunction with the NAME parameter to close a currently open Toolbar.

•	IMPORT/S: Use IMPORT in conjunction with the NAME parameter to import toolbars into your Directory Opus configuration. Opus will automatically copy the named toolbar file to your Toolbars folder and then open it as a floating toolbar.

•	LINE/K: This parameter lets you specify the line and position a new Toolbar is to open on. For example:

 Toolbar "My Toolbar" TOGGLE STATE=top LINE=1

This would open the toolbar on line 1 at the top of the Lister (counting from 0). Also,

Toolbar "Drive Bar" TOGGLE STATE=bottom LINE=2,500

This would open the toolbar on line 2 at the bottom of the Lister, 500 pixels from the left.

•	LIST/S: This is a dynamic command that generates a list of your saved Toolbars and lets you turn them on or off.

•	LOCAL/S: If you specify the LOCAL switch when opening a toolbar, the toolbar will only appear in the current Lister rather than appearing in all Listers.

•	NAME: Specifies the name of the Toolbar, as saved in the Directory Opus Buttons folder. You do not need to specify the .dop filename extension. The default action of this command when a name is specified is to open that Toolbar unless it is already open.

•	POS/K: The POS argument lets you specify the position for a floating toolbar. You can specify absolute coordinates, for example Toolbar NAME=Applications POS=100,50 STATE=float. You can also specify POS=mouse to center the floating toolbar over the mouse pointer, mouser to right-align it with the mouse pointer, and mousel to left-align it with the mouse pointer.

•	STATE/K: This switch can be used with the NAME parameter to specify the state of the Toolbar when it is opened. The states top, bottom, left and right refer to the top, bottom, left and right edges of the Lister. The center state describes the position between the two displays of a dual-file display Lister. The viewpane state describes the position between the Lister Viewer Pane and the file display. The tree state describes the position between the Folder Tree and the file display. The float state describes a floating Toolbar. If the Toolbar is not currently open, you can set its state to any of these options when you open it. If the Toolbar is already open, you can only use the STATE parameter to switch it from floating to non-floating and vice versa.

•	TOGGLE/S: Use this switch in conjunction with the NAME parameter to toggle a Toolbar on or off.


Undo

The Undo command provides access to the Directory Opus undo system. This lets you undo many file actions that you have made, including copies, renames and deletes (if the Recycle Bin has been used). When used by itself, with no options specified, this command undoes the last performed file command. The command template for this command is:

ITEM/K,LIST/S,LISTMENU/S,PAGE/S:

•	ITEM/K: This option lets you undo a specific action in the Undo list. You must specify the action number to undo.

•	LIST/S: This option acts as a dynamic command and generates a list of all undoable actions. You can select an item from this list to undo a specific action without having to undo all actions in the list.

•	LISTMENU/S: This option is the same as the LIST option except that the undo items are displayed in a popup submenu rather than in the Toolbar or menu itself. If there are no undoable items, the submenu is not displayed at all.

•	PAGE/S: The PAGE option opens the Output Window and displays the Undo page, where you can see the list of undoable actions and selectively undo them.


Sample Hotkeys

By default, the following traditional Windows key sequences are implemented or emulated using internal Opus commands:

Key	Action
F1	Help
F2	In-line Rename
F3	Find
F4	Activate path field
F5	Refresh
F10	Activate menus
Ctrl + Tab	Cycle between Listers (or panes in a dual file display Lister)
Ctrl + C	Copy, (Clipboard Copy)
Ctrl + X	Cut (Clipboard Cut)
Ctrl + V	Paste (Clipboard Paste)
Ctrl + A	Select all
Ctrl + F	Find
Ctrl + Z	Undo
Ctrl + Up/Down cursor	Scrolls list in Details mode (without changing selection)
Backspace	Parent (Go up)
Alt + Left/Right cursor	Previous/next path in history
Alt + Enter	Properties
Shift + Delete	Delete file without Recycle Bin
Shift + F10	Context menu


Predefined File Types

Opus 8 comes with several special predefined file types to match All files, All folders, All files and folders, Recognized images and Unknown file types. The file type for All files and folders defines default actions for the following events:

Action	Opus Command
Double-click + Ctrl	Properties
Drag & Drop	Copy Movewhensame
Drag & Drop + Alt	Copy Makeshortcut
Drag & Drop + Ctrl	Copy
Drag & Drop + Shift	Copy Move
So, if you drag a file and drop it onto another Lister using the left mouse button, the file will be moved if the source and destination Listers are on the same drive, or copied if they are on different drives. This behavior is consistent with Windows Explorer. The default file type mimics the way Explorer works but as shown above, if you hold down qualifier keys you can modify the behavior of drag and drop. Unlike Explorer, all actions can be configured in Directory Opus!

The Recognized images file type is a special Opus-only file type that refers to all files that Opus recognizes as images. It can be used to add context menu items to any image files without having to add them to each individual file type.

The Unknown file types file type is a special file type that matches any file that doesn’t match any other file type.

If you drag with the right mouse button and drop over an Opus Lister, the drag and drop menu is displayed. This menu is constructed first from any Opus file types that match the selected files, then from drag and drop menu items configured for the Windows file type, then from any ‘DragDropHandlers’ configured for that file type by Windows, and then finally the default actions of Copy, Move and Shortcut.

In a similar manner, a double-click on a file or folders is supported through the file types system as well. For a summary, see the chapter on The Lister and the section on Double Click on Folders.


External Command Control Codes

When Directory Opus launches an external application program from a Toolbar button or menu item, the command definition can include special control sequences which tell Opus to insert specific information into the command line.

The control sequences generally take the form of one or more characters surrounded by {braces}. There is always at least one synonym for a control sequence that performs the same function. For example, all control sequences have a short and a long form that can be used interchangeably. The short form requires less typing and produces a smaller function definition, while the long form is more descriptive and may make the function more understandable.

Symbol	Description	Symbol	Description
f	file path	O	all files
!	not required	*s	short
$	required	s	source
o	file	d	destination
F	all files and paths	R	dialog
A legend of the symbols used for the short control sequences.

Several commands or prefixes have special meaning within an Opus function definition and can be used to modify the way external programs are launched.

You can use the cd command to change the ‘start in’ or ‘working folder’ of an external program. Use cd {sourcepath} to automatically set the ‘start in’ folder of an external program to the current path in the source Lister.

You can use the runmode command to change the ‘Run’ state of the program. This command takes a single parameter, either min, max or hide to specify a minimized, maximized or hidden main window – if not given, the program is started in normal mode. Please note that not all programs will support this setting. You should only set the runmode to hide if you are sure of what you are doing – it is most useful for hiding the otherwise brief flash of a DOS window when running a DOS program.

When you define a function to run an external program, you can prefix the program name with the string sync: to cause it to be started synchronously. This lets you start multiple programs in order.

Functions that are defined as MS-DOS Batch Functions are run as if they were batch (.bat) files. Because of the way the Windows batch file processor works, calling external batch files from an Opus batch function would not automatically work correctly. To overcome this, Opus automatically prefixes external batch files with the call command to ensure they are run correctly. If you wish to override this behavior you can prefix the name of the batch file with nocall:

You can use the ddeexec, ddeapp and ddetopic commands to create a function that executes a DDE conversation with another application. For example, to create a button that opens a picture in ACDSee using DDE you would define the following instructions:

ddeexec  [open("%1")]

ddeapp   ACDSee\

ddetopic System

"C:\Program Files\ACD Systems\ACDSee\ACDSee.exe" /dde

dopusrt is supported by the external command system as a shortcut for the actual location of the dopusrt.exe program. Instead of specifying, for example, sync:c:\Program Files\GP Software\Directory Opus\dopusrt.exe you can just use sync:dopusrt.

You can use dopusrt in conjunction with the /cmd parameter to send commands to Opus as if they were external programs, which allows you to use all the Opus external command functions with the internal commands. For example,

sync:dopusrt /cmd CreateFolder {dlgstring}

The @codepage instruction can be added to a MSDOS batch command function to set the code page for the function under 2000/XP. If not specified, Opus sets it automatically to 1252, which is the same as Windows. This fixes problems when using filenames high-bit ASCII characters in external functions.Windows 9x does not support the changing of the code page in batch files.

The @filesfromdroponly instruction can be added to an Opus function to stop the function using the selected files in the Lister when it is executed. If you specify this, the function will only accept files if they are dragged and dropped onto the button.

The @nodeselect instruction can be added to an Opus function to prevent any files and folders used by that function from being deselected once the function is complete.

The @useactivelister instruction can be added to an Opus function to make it use the path and files from the active Lister instead of from the source Lister (although the active and source Listers may often be, they are not necessarily the same.)

The @nofilenamequoting instruction can be added to an external function to disable the quotes that Opus automatically puts around filenames with spaces in them.

The @nolocalizefiles directive can be added to an Opus function to prevent Opus from automatically downloading FTP files. For example, a filename that passes selected filenames to a download manager would not want Opus to automatically download the files. If @nolocalizefiles is added to the function, codes like {filepath$} will return the URL of the selected file rather than a temporary downloaded copy.

Control Sequence	Meaning
{filepath} {f!} %1 %2 %L	Directory Opus inserts the name of the first selected file or folder in the active Lister. The filename is in long filename format and is supplied with the full path. The %1, %2 and %L sequences are compatible with Explorer. If there is no selected file in the active Lister, this control sequence is omitted. This code and all others that return the name of a file or files can take an optional flag which allows you to strip or replace the filename extension. For example, {filepath|noext} strips the filename extension from the filename returned {filepath|ext=tmp} replaces the filename extension with .tmp
{filepath$} {f}	The same as {filepath}, except that there must be a selected file in the active Lister or else the function will not be run.
{file} {o!}	This control sequence inserts the name of the first selected file or folder in the active Lister. The filename is in long filename format, but does not contain the full path – only the filename itself is supplied. If there is no selected file in the active Lister, this control sequence is omitted.
{file$} {o}	The same as {file}, except that there must be a selected file in the active Lister or else the function will not be run.
{allfilepath} {F!} %*	This control sequence inserts the name of all selected files and folders in the active Lister. The filenames are supplied in long filename format with the full path included. If a filename contains a space it is automatically enclosed with quotation marks. The filenames are separated by spaces. The %* control sequence is compatible with Explorer. If there are no selected files in the active Lister, this control sequence is omitted.
{allfilepath$} {F}	The same as {allfilepath}, except that there must be at least one selected file in the active Lister or else the function will not be run.
{allfile} {O!}	This is the same as {allfilepath} except that the filenames do not include the full path – only the filenames themselves are supplied.
{allfile$} {O}	The same as {allfile}, except that there must be at least one selected file in the active Lister or else the function will not be run.
{filepathshort} {fs!}	This is the same as {filepath} except that the filename is supplied in short filename format. This is useful for running 16 bit programs
{filepathshort$} {fs}	The same as {filepath$} except that the filename is supplied in short filename format.
{fileshort} {os!}	The same as {file} except that the filename is supplied in short filename format.
{fileshort$} {os}	The same as {file$} except that the filename is supplied in short filename format.
{allfilepathshort} {Fs!}	The same as {allfilepath} except that the filenames are supplied in short filename format.
{allfilepathshort$} {Fs}	The same as {allfilepath$} except that the filenames are supplied in short filename format.
{allfileshort} {Os!}	The same as {allfile} except that the filenames are supplied in short filename format.
{allfileshort$} {Os}	The same as {allfile$} except that the filenames are supplied in short filename format.
{filepathdest} {fd!}	The same as {filepath} except that the filenames come from the destination Lister rather than the source.
{filepathdest$} {fd}	The same as {filepath$} except that the filenames from the destination Lister rather than the source.
{filedest} {od!}	The same as {file} but with filenames from the destination Lister.
{filedest$} {od}	The same as {file$} but with filenames from the destination Lister.
{allfilepathdest} {Fd!}	The same as {allfilepath} but with filenames from the destination Lister.
{allfilepathdest$} {Fd}	The same as {allfilepath$} but with filenames from the destination Lister.
{allfiledest} {Od!}	The same as {allfile} but with filenames from the destination Lister.
{allfiledest$} {Od}	The same as {allfile$} but with filenames from the destination Lister.
{filepathshortdest} {fsd!}	The same as {filepathshort} but with filenames from the destination Lister.
{filepathshortdest$} {fsd}	The same as {filepathshort$} but with filenames from the destination Lister.
{fileshortdest} {osd!}	The same as {fileshort} but with filenames from the destination Lister.
{fileshortdest$} {osd}	The same as {fileshort$} but with filenames from the destination Lister.
{allfilepathshortdest} {Fsd!}	The same as {allfilepathshort} but with filenames from the destination Lister.
{allfilepathshortdest$} {Fsd}	The same as {allfilepathshort$} but with filenames from the destination Lister.
{allfileshortdest} {Osd!}	The same as {allfileshort} but with filenames from the destination Lister.
{allfileshortdest$} {Osd}	The same as {allfileshort$} but with filenames from the destination Lister.
{sourcepath} {s!}	This control sequence inserts the path of the folder in the source Lister. The path is supplied in long filename format. If there is no valid source Lister, this control sequence is omitted. Add |noterm to the control sequence to strip trailing path termination (eg {sourcepath|noterm})
{sourcepath$} {s}	The same as {sourcepath} except that if there is no valid source Lister the function will not be run.
{destpath} {d!}	This control sequence inserts the path of the folder in the destination Lister (or, in the case of a dual file-display Lister, the destination file display). If there is no valid destination path, this control sequence is omitted.
{destpath$} {d}	The same as {destpath} except that if there is no valid destination path the function will not be run.
{sourcepathshort} {ss!}	The same as {sourcepath} except that the path is supplied in short filename format.
{sourcepathshort$} {ss}	The same as {sourcepath$} except that the path is supplied in short filename format.
{destpathshort} {ds!}	The same as {destpath} except that the path is supplied in short filename format
{destpathshort$} {ds}	The same as {destpath$} except that the path is supplied in short filename format.
{dlgopen} {Rf}	This control sequence causes Directory Opus to display an Open File dialog, letting you select a file. The name of the selected file is then inserted into the function. You can also optionally supply the title string for the file dialog and a default value for the filename. This is done using the vertical bar inside the control sequence itself. For example, {dlgopen|Select filename|dopus.txt} This would use Select filename as the dialog title, and the default filename would be dopus.txt.
{dlgmulti} {Rm}	The same as {dlgopen} except that the Open File dialog supports multiple file selection.
{dlgsave} {RF}	The same as {dlgopen} except that the dialog that is displayed is a Save File dialog.
{dlgfolder} {Rd}	The same as {dlgopen} except that the dialog that is displayed is a Browse For Folder dialog.
{dlgstring} {Rs}	This control sequence causes Directory Opus to display a dialog prompting you to enter a text string. The entered string is then inserted into the function. This also supports the specifying of dialog title and default string using vertical bars as shown in the example for {dlgopen}.
{date}	Inserts the current date into the function. Can include a formatting string, for example {date|dd’-‘MMM’-‘yyy}
{time}	Inserts the current time into the function. Can include a formatting string, for example {time|hh’:’mm}

The formatting codes for the {date} and {time} codes are as follows:

Date codes	Description
d	Day of month as digits with no leading zero for single-digit days.
dd	Day of month as digits with leading zero for single-digit days.
ddd	Day of week as a three-letter abbreviation.
dddd	Day of week as its full name.
M	Month as digits with no leading zero for single-digit months.
MM	Month as digits with leading zero for single-digit months.
MMM	Month as a three-letter abbreviation.
MMMM	Month as its full name.
y	Year as last two digits, but with no leading zero for years less than 10.
yy	Year as last two digits, but with leading zero for years less than 10.
yyyy	Year represented by full four digits.
gg	Period/era string. This code is ignored if the date to be formatted does not have an associated era or period string.
Time codes	Description
h	Hours with no leading zero for single-digit hours; 12-hour clock.
hh	Hours with leading zero for single-digit hours; 12-hour clock.
H	Hours with no leading zero for single-digit hours; 24-hour clock.
HH	Hours with leading zero for single-digit hours; 24-hour clock.
m	Minutes with no leading zero for single-digit minutes.
mm	Minutes with leading zero for single-digit minutes.
s	Seconds with no leading zero for single-digit seconds.
ss	Seconds with leading zero for single-digit seconds.
t	One character time-marker string, such as A or P.
tt	Multi-character time-marker string, such as AM or PM.

The dialog control codes listed above can also be used in conjunction with internal Opus commands. For example, you could have a function like Set SHOWFILTERFILENAME={dlgstring|Enter file pattern to show files} to display a dialog letting you enter a show pattern.


Status Bar Control Sequences

Directory Opus allows you to totally configure the information displayed on the status bar at the bottom of each Lister. The status bar text is configured using special control sequences that tell Directory Opus to insert information into the status bar display. The control sequences consist of various characters enclosed with {braces}. Usually the information displayed describes the state of the current Lister, or in the case of a dual-file display Lister, the source file display. However, using additional codes you can display information simultaneously for both the left- and right-hand (or top and bottom) file displays in a dual-file display Lister.

Type	Seq	Description
Selected folders Displays the number of selected folders.	{sd} {sdD} {sdL} {sdR}	Selected folders in the current/source Lister Selected folders in the destination file display Selected folders in the left-hand file display Selected folders in the right-hand file display
Selected files Displays the number of selected files.	{sf} {sfD} {sfL} {sfR}	Selected files in the current/source Lister Selected files in the destination file display Selected files in the left-hand file display Selected files in the right-hand file display
Selected items Displays number of selected items (both files and folders).	{si} {siD} {siL} {siR}	Selected items in the current/source Lister Selected items in the destination file display Selected items in the left-hand file display Selected items in the right-hand file display
Selected bytes Displays the total byte size of all selected files and folders. Displayed as either the number of bytes (the b or default option), or in bytes, Kb, Mb or Gb automatically depending on the size (the a option).	{sb} {sba} {sbDb} {sbDa} {sbLb} {sbLa} {sbRb} {sbRa}	Selected bytes in the current/source Lister (bytes) Selected bytes in the current/source Lister (automatic)  Selected bytes in the destination file display (bytes) Selected bytes in the destination file display (automatic) Selected bytes in the left-hand file display (bytes) Selected bytes in the left-hand file display (automatic) Selected bytes in the right-hand file display (bytes) Selected bytes in the right-hand file display (automatic)
Selected file bytes Displays the total byte size of all selected files only.	{sbf} {sbfa} {sbfDb} {sbfDa} {sbfLb} {sbfLa} {sbfRb} {sbfRa}	Selected file bytes in the current/source Lister (bytes) Selected file bytes in the current/source Lister (automatic) Selected file bytes in the destination file display (bytes) Selected file bytes in the destination file display (automatic) Selected file bytes in the left-hand file display (bytes) Selected file bytes in the left-hand file display (automatic) Selected file bytes in the right-hand file display (bytes) Selected file bytes in the right-hand file display (automatic)
Selected folder bytes Displays the total byte size of all selected folders only.	{sbd} {sbda} {sbdDb} {sbdDa} {sbdLb} {sbdLa} {sbdRb} {sbdRa}	Selected folder bytes in the current/source Lister (bytes) Selected folder bytes in the current/source Lister (auto) Selected folder bytes in the destination file display (bytes) Selected folder bytes in the destination file display (auto) Selected folder bytes in the left-hand file display (bytes) Selected folder bytes in the left-hand file display (auto) Selected folder bytes in the right-hand file display (bytes) Selected folder bytes in the right-hand file display (auto)
Total folders Displays the total number of folders.	{td} {tdD} {tdL} {tdR}	Total number of folders in the current/source Lister Total number of folders in the destination file display Total number of folders in the left-hand file display Total number of folders in the right-hand file display
Total files Displays the total number of files.	{tf} {tfD} {tfL} {tfR}	Total number of files in the current/source Lister Total number of files in the destination file display Total number of files in the left-hand file display Total number of files in the right-hand file display
Total items Displays the total number of items (both files and folders).	{ti} {tiD} {tiL} {tiR}	Total number of items in the current/source Lister Total number of items in the destination file display Total number of items in the left-hand file display Total number of items in the right-hand file display
Total bytes Displays the total byte size of all files and folders. Displayed as either the number of bytes (the b or default option), or in bytes, Kb, Mb or Gb automatically depending on the size (the a option).	{tb} {tba} {tbDb} {tbDa} {tbLb} {tbLa} {tbRb} {tbRa}	Total bytes in the current/source Lister (bytes) Total bytes in the current/source Lister (automatic) Total bytes in the destination file display (bytes) Total bytes in the destination file display (automatic) Total bytes in the left-hand file display (bytes) Total bytes in the left-hand file display (automatic) Total bytes in the right-hand file display (bytes) Total bytes in the right-hand file display (automatic)
Total file bytes Displays the total byte size of all files only.	{tbf} {tbfa} {tbfDb} {tbfDa} {tbfLb} {tbfLa} {tbfRb} {tbfRa}	Total file bytes in the current/source Lister (bytes) Total file bytes in the current/source Lister (automatic) Total file bytes in the destination file display (bytes) Total file bytes in the destination file display (automatic) Total file bytes in the left-hand file display (bytes) Total file bytes in the left-hand file display (automatic) Total file bytes in the right-hand file display (bytes) Total file bytes in the right-hand file display (automatic)
Total folder bytes Displays the total byte size of all folders only.	{tbd} {tbda} {tbdDb} {tbdDa} {tbdLb} {tbdLa} {tbdRb} {tbdRa}	Total folder bytes in the current/source Lister (bytes) Total folder bytes in the current/source Lister (automatic) Total folder bytes in the destination file display (bytes) Total folder bytes in the destination file display (automatic) Total folder bytes in the left-hand file display (bytes) Total folder bytes in the left-hand file display (automatic) Total folder bytes in the right-hand file display (bytes) Total folder bytes in the right-hand file display (automatic)
Hidden items Displays the total number of items that have been hidden by a filter or by the Select command.	{hi} {hiD} {hiL} {hiR}	Number of hidden items in the current/source Lister Number of hidden items in the destination file display Number of hidden items in the left-hand file display Number of hidden items in the right-hand file display
Hidden bytes Displays the total byte size of files and folders that have been hidden by a filter or by the Select command. Displayed as either the number of bytes (the b or default option), or in bytes, Kb, Mb or Gb automatically depending on the size (the a option).	{hb} {hba} {hbDb} {hbDa} {hbLb} {hbLa} {hbRb} {hbRa}	Hidden bytes in the current/source Lister (bytes) Hidden bytes in the current/source Lister (automatic) Hidden bytes in the destination file display (bytes) Hidden bytes in the destination file display (automatic) Hidden bytes in the left-hand file display (bytes) Hidden bytes in the left-hand file display (automatic) Hidden bytes in the right-hand file display (bytes) Hidden bytes in the right-hand file display (automatic)
Hidden file bytes Displays the total byte size of hidden files only.	{hbf} {hbfa} {hbfDb} {hbfDa} {hbfLb} {hbfLa} {hbfRb} {hbfRa}	Hidden file bytes in the current/source Lister (bytes) Hidden file bytes in the current/source Lister (automatic) Hidden file bytes in the destination file display (bytes) Hidden file bytes in the destination file display (automatic) Hidden file bytes in the left-hand file display (bytes) Hidden file bytes in the left-hand file display (automatic) Hidden file bytes in the right-hand file display (bytes) Hidden file bytes in the right-hand file display (automatic)
Hidden folder bytes Displays the total byte size of hidden folders only.	{hbd} {hbda} {hbdDb} {hbdDa} {hbdLb} {hbdLa} {hbdRb} {hbdRa}	Hidden folder bytes in the current/source Lister (bytes) Hidden folder bytes in the current/source Lister (automatic) Hidden folder bytes in the destination file display (bytes) Hidden folder bytes in the destination file display (automatic) Hidden folder bytes in the left-hand file display (bytes) Hidden folder bytes in the left-hand file display (automatic) Hidden folder bytes in the right-hand file display (bytes) Hidden folder bytes in the right-hand file display (automatic)
Lister state Displays the current state of the Lister (source, destination, off, or dual-file display).	{ls}	Displays the current state of the Lister
Disk space free Displays the amount of free space on the current disk. Displays either as the number of bytes, or in bytes, Kb, Mb or Gb automatically depending on the size.	{dfb} {dfa} {dfDb} {dfDa} {dfLb} {dfLa} {dfRb} {dfRa}	Disk space free in the current/source Lister (bytes) Disk space free in the current/source Lister (automatic) Disk space free in the destination file display (bytes) Disk space free in the destination file display (automatic) Disk space free in the left-hand file display (bytes) Disk space free in the left-hand file display (automatic) Disk space free in the right-hand file display (bytes) Disk space free in the right-hand file display (automatic)
Disk space used Displays the amount of used space on the current disk.	{dub} {dua} {duDb} {duDa} {duLb} {duLa} {duRb} {duRa}	Disk space used in the current/source Lister (bytes) Disk space used in the current/source Lister (automatic) Disk space used in the destination file display (bytes) Disk space used in the destination file display (automatic) Disk space used in the left-hand file display (bytes) Disk space used in the left-hand file display (automatic) Disk space used in the right-hand file display (bytes) Disk space used in the right-hand file display (automatic)
Disk space total Displays the total amount of space on the current disk (both used and free).	{dtb} {dta} {dtDb} {dtDa} {dtLb} {dtLa} {dtRb} {dtRa}	Total disk space in the current/source Lister (bytes) Total disk space in the current/source Lister (automatic) Total disk space in the destination file display (bytes) Total disk space in the destination file display (automatic) Total disk space in the left-hand file display (bytes) Total disk space in the left-hand file display (automatic) Total disk space in the right-hand file display (bytes) Total disk space in the right-hand file display (automatic)
Percentage of disk space free Displays the amount of free disk space as a percentage.	{pf} {pfD} {pfL} {pfR}	Percentage of disk space free in the current/source Lister Percentage of disk space free in the destination file display Percentage of disk space free in the left-hand file display Percentage of disk space free in the right-hand file display
Percentage of disk space used Displays the amount of used disk space as a percentage.	{pu} {puD} {puL} {puR}	Percentage of disk space used in the current/source Lister Percentage of disk space used in the destination file display Percentage of disk space used in the left-hand file display Percentage of disk space used in the right-hand file display
Total song length Displays the total length of all songs in the current folder.	{tmp3}	Note that you need to have at least one of the song columns displayed in the Lister for this to work.
Selected song length Displays the total length of all selected songs in the current folder.	{smp3}	Note that you need to have at least one of the song columns displayed in the Lister for this to work.
Hide section if zero This code does not display anything itself, rather it is used to mark a section of the status bar to be hidden if the value of the codes within the hidden section is zero.	{h!}	For example, {h!}Hidden items: {hi}{h!} only displays the Hidden items string if the value of {hi} is not zero, that is, there are hidden items in the current Lister. You must place a {h!} at the beginning and at the end of the section to conditionally hide. You can also include control sequences within the {h!} sequence itself, to test the value of a control sequence without actually displaying the value. For example, {h!{si}}Some items selected{h!} would only display the text Some items selected if the value of the {si} code was not zero, however the value of {si} would not actually be displayed.
Hide section if not zero This code does not display anything itself, rather it is used to mark a section of the status bar to be hidden if the value of the codes within the hidden section is not zero.	{h?}	This is similar to {h!} except the test is for not zero rather than zero. For example, {h?{si}}{ti} object(s){h!} would display the xx object(s) string only if there were no selected items ({si} is zero). If {si} was not zero, the string would not be displayed. Examine the Sample status bar strings provided in the Lister Display section of Preferences for more examples of how the hidden section codes can be used.
Pad to percentage of total space This code is used to pad a status bar section to a percentage of the total width of the status bar.	{padX}	X is a value from 1 to 100. If this code appears in a status bar section, that section will be padded to a size relative to the total width of the status bar. For example, {pad50} sets a section width to 50% of the total width of the Lister.
Pad to percentage of remaining space This code is used to pad a status bar section to a percentage of the remaining width of the status bar.	{rpadX}	X is a value from 1 to 100. Status Bar sections are evaluated from left to right. When the {rpad} code appears in a status bar section, that section will be padded to a size relative to the remaining space in the status bar.
Pad to width of Folder Tree This code sets the width of a status bar section to the same as the width of the Folder Tree.	{wtree} {wtree2}	If this code appears in a status bar section, the section is set to the same width as the Folder Tree (if enabled) in the current Lister.
Pad to width of left-hand file display This code sets the width of a status bar section to the same as the width of the left-hand file display.	{wleft}	If this code appears in a status bar section, the section is set to the same width as the left-hand file display (if the current Lister is in dual-file display mode).
Pad to right-edge of Folder Tree	{rtree} {rtree2}	If this code appears in a status bar section, the section is padded so that the right-hand edge of the section is aligned with the right-hand edge of the Folder Tree (if enabled) in the current Lister.
Pad to right-edge of left-hand file display	{rleft}	If this code appears in a status bar section, the section is padded so that the right-hand edge of the section is aligned with the right-hand edge of the left-hand file display (if the current Lister is in dual-file display mode).
Format lock control This code lets you add the Format lock control to the status bar.	{fl}	The format lock is a control that can be added to the status bar which lets you lock the current format in the Lister. When locked, the format will not be automatically changed by saved Folder Options when changing between folders.
Drive letter	{dlet}	Displays the current drive letter
Drive label	{dlab}	Displays the current drive label


Pattern Matching Syntax

The native Opus pattern matching system is extensive, easy to learn, and good for all but the most complicated pattern matching demands. It provides some of the ability of regular expression patterns but is far easier to use! Here are the available tokens:

Chars	Example	Description
#	#x	The following x character or expression is repeated 0 or more times.
?	?	Item matching a single non-NUL character.
|	a|b|c	Matches one of multiple strings.
~	~x	This expression matches if the item x doesn't match.
()	(a)	Parenthesis allows you to combine separate expressions.
[]	[a-z]	Matches a single character out of the set.
[~]	[~a-z]	Matches a single non-NUL character not in the set.
‘	'c	Escapes the following character.
*	*	Same as #? but optional.
Here are a few examples:

Pattern	Matches
#? or *	All files.
*.jpg	Files with the .jpg extension.
*abc*	Files containing ‘abc’.
*.(cpp|c|hpp|h)	Files with extensions cpp, c, hpp or h.
image[0-9]*	Files starting with ‘image’ followed by a digit 0-9.


Regular Expression Syntax

For cases where you wish to match simple patterns we recommend the native Opus pattern matching system. However, for more complicated sequences, full regular expression pattern matching is available in many Opus dialogs.

Normally, when you search for a sub-string in a string, the match should be exact. So if we search for a sub-string "abc" then the string being searched should contain these exact letters in the same sequence for a match to be found. We can extend this kind of search to a case insensitive search where the sub-string "abc" will find strings like "Abc", "ABC" etc. That is, the case is ignored but the sequence of the letters should be exactly the same. Sometimes, a case insensitive search is also not enough. For example, if we want to search for numeric digit, then we basically end up searching for each digit independently. This is where regular expressions can be helpful.

Regular expressions are text patterns that are used for string matching. Regular expressions are strings that contain a mix of plain text and special characters or tokens to indicate what kind of matching to do. Here's a very brief tutorial on using regular expressions

Suppose we are looking for a numeric digit then the regular expression we would search for is "[0-9]". The brackets indicate that the character being compared should match any one of the characters enclosed within the bracket. The dash (-) between 0 and 9 indicates that it is a range from 0 to 9. Therefore, this regular expression will match any character between 0 and 9, that is, any digit. If we want to search for a special character literally we must use a backslash before the special character. For example, the single character regular expression "\*" matches a single asterisk. The special characters are briefly described below.

Chars	Description
^	Beginning of the string. The expression "^A" will match an ‘A’ only at the beginning of the string.
^	The caret (^) immediately following the left-bracket ([) has a different meaning. It is used to exclude the remaining characters within brackets from matching the target string. The expression "[^0-9]" indicates that the target character should not be a digit.
$	The dollar sign ($) will match the end of the string. The expression "abc$" will match the sub-string "abc" only if it is at the end of the string.
|	The alternation character (|) allows either expression on its side to match the target string. The expression "a|b" will match ‘a’ as well as ‘b’.
.	The dot (.) will match any character.
*	The asterisk (*) indicates that the character to the left of the asterisk in the expression should match 0 or more times.
+	The plus (+) is similar to asterisk but there should be at least one match of the character to the left of the + sign in the expression.
?	The question mark (?) matches the character to its left 0 or 1 times.
()	The parenthesis affects the order of pattern evaluation and also serves as a tagged expression that can be used when replacing the matched sub-string with another expression.
[]	Brackets ([ and ]) enclosing a set of characters indicates that any of the enclosed characters may match the target character.
\	The backslash character in the search string escapes any of the above characters. For example, "\." (slash dot) means search for a dot character.

The parenthesis, besides affecting the evaluation order of the regular expression, also serves as tagged expression which is something like a temporary memory. This memory can then be used when we want to replace the found expression with a new expression. In the replace expression you can specify an ‘&’ character which represents the sub-string found in the match expression. For example, if the sub-string that matched the regular expression was "ABCD", then a replace expression of "xyz&xyz" would generate the string "xyzABCDxyz". The replace expression can also be expressed using a tagged expression such as "\0",for example,"xyz\0xyz". The "\0" indicates a tagged expression representing the entire sub-string that was matched. Similarly we can have other tagged expression represented by "\1", "\2" for the progressively matched strings. Note that although the tagged expression 0 is always defined, the tagged expressions 1, 2 etc. are only defined if the regular expression used in the search had enough sets of parenthesis. Here are few examples.

String	Search	Replace	Result
Mr.jpg	(Mr)(\..*)	\1s\2	Mrs.jpg
abc	(a)b(c)	&-\1-\2	abc-a-c
bcd	(a|b)c*d	&-\1	bcd-b
abcde	(.*)c(.*)	&-\1-\2	abcde-ab-de
cde	(ab|cd)e	&-\1	cde-cd
When using regular expressions with the Rename command, you can append a # symbol to the end of the "old name" pattern to signify that you want the pattern to be repeated. This lets you effectively turn regular expression into a "find and replace" system. You can also specify a maximum number of repetitions by following the # with a number, for example:

(.*) – (.*)#5


Raw Commands Reference Tables

Following is a complete list of the Directory Opus 8 internal commands and parameters.

CLI
<no parameters>		Opens CLI window
DOSPROMPT/O	<no parameters>	Opens a DOS prompt with CD set to current source Lister
	here	Opens a DOS prompt with CD set to selected sub-folder
Clipboard
<no parameters>		<no action>
ADD/S		Use together with COPY; selected files are added to the clipboard contents and any existing files on clipboard are preserved
COPY/S		Copy selected files and folders to the clipboard
COPYNAMES/O	<no parameters>	Copy the names of selected files and folders to the clipboard (as text)
	nopaths	Copy names only without paths
	url	Copy filenames as URLs
	hash	Copy filenames and MD5 checksums
	hash2	Copy filenames and MD5 checksums, formats text to be compatible with md5sum program
	unc	When files are on a network share, copy the full UNC path
CUT/S		Cut selected files and folders to the clipboard
NOFROMFOCUS/S		Operate only on the source file display rather than the window with input focus (Folder Tree or a file display)
PASTE/S		Paste clipboard contents to current source Lister. Files on clipboard will be copied (or moved). Images on clipboard will be saved as an image file, and text on clipboard will be saved as a text file.
PASTESHORTCUT/S		Paste shortcuts to files and folders on clipboard
USESEL/S		Modifies PASTE and PASTESHORTCUT; paste into the selected sub-folder if there is one, rather than into the current source folder
Close
<no parameters>		Close the current Lister
ALLLISTERS/S		Close all open Listers
ALLOTHERLISTERS/S		Close all open Listers except the current one
AT/K	hh:mm:ss	Use with SYSTEM to schedule a shutdown at the specified time
CANCEL/S		Cancel a previously scheduled shutdown
IN/K	hh:mm:ss	Use with SYSTEM to schedule a shutdown after a specified duration
PROGRAM/S		Exit Directory Opus
QUIET/S		Disable confirmation prompt
SYSTEM/O	<no parameters>	Log off the current user
	restart	Restart the system
	shutdown	Shut the system down
	poweroff	Shut down and power off
	force	Force immediate shutdown or restart
	forceifhung	Force if there are non-responding programs (Windows 2000 or better)
TOGGLE/S		Toggle auto-shutdown on and off
WHENFINISHED/S		Use with SYSTEM to automatically shutdown when all currently executing Opus functions have completed
ContextMenu
<no parameters>		<no action>
FILE/K/M	<filenames>	Specify the files to perform the context menu action on. Operates on selected files if no filenames specified. System namespace folders can be specified by GUID, for example the Recycle Bin is ::{645FF040-5081-101B-9F08-00AA002F954E}
ID/K/N	<command id>	The context menu command ID to invoke
SHOWCMDS/S		Displays the available context menu commands for the specified items. Depending on your OS, context menu commands may have associated verbs which are easier to use than command IDs
VERB	<verb>	The context menu command verb to invoke
Copy
<no parameters>		Copy all selected files and folders to the current destination
ADDTOZIP/S		Add selected files to a ZIP file, prompting for the ZIP file name and parameters
AS/O	<no parameters>	Prompts for new names for files to be copied
	<name>	Change name of copied file to specified name or wildcard pattern
BURNCD/S		Invokes the Windows XP CD Burning Wizard
DUPLICATE/S		Duplicate files in same location
EXTRACT/O	<no parameters>	If copying a folder or ZIP file, extract contents to the destination
	sub	Extract ZIP file contents to a new sub-folder in the destination
	checkout	Auto-extract enter ZIP file contents to a temporary folder and open in a new Lister
FILE/M	<filenames>	Specify the files to copy or move
FILTER/O	<no parameters>	Prompt for a file filter before copying files
	shift	Prompt for filter if shift key is held down
	alt	Prompt for filter if alt key is held down
	ctrl	Prompt for filter if control key is held down
	<filter name>	Use specified filter to copy files
FORCE/S		Suppress prompts and automatically replace existing files
HERE/S		Use the source folder as the destination
INSTALLFONT/S		Automatically install font files (when copying into the Windows Fonts folder)
MAKESHORTCUT/S		Make shortcuts in the destination folder to selected files
MOVE/S		Move all selected files and folders to the destination
MOVEWHENSAME/S		When source and destination are the same drive, move files instead of copying
NOZIPBATCH/S		Disables the ZIP batch add and extract modes for this action
RENAMEWHENSAME/S		Automatically rename copied files if the source and destination are the same folder
SENDMAIL/O	<no parameters>	Send files as email attachments (prompts for recipient)
	<email address>	Send files to specified email address
SENDTO/K	<target>	Equivalent to selecting ‘Send To’ from the context menu for selected files. The value supplied must be the name of the item in the system SendTo folder.
TO/K	<path>	Specify the destination path
UPDATEALL/S		Only copy files that are newer or don’t exist in the destination
UPDATEEXISTING/O	<no parameters>	Only copy files that already exist in the destination and have changed
	size	Only copy files if the size is different
	date	Only copy files if the date is different
UPDATETOLERANCE/K/N	<seconds>	Specify the tolerance for date testing, in seconds
WHENEXISTS/O	<no parameters>	<no action; performs default behavior for existing files>
	ask	Prompt to replace existing files
	replace	Automatically replace existing files
	rename	Automatically rename new files
	resume	Automatically resume files (FTP only)
	skip	Automatically skip existing files
WINMSGR/K	<contact>	Send files via Windows Messenger to specified contact
	list	Displays list of contacts to send files to
	submenu	Displays contact list in a sub-menu
ZIP/O	<no parameters>	ZIP all selected files to the one ZIP file
	single	ZIP selected files to individual ZIP files (each file goes into its own ZIP file)
CreateFolder
<no parameters>		Prompts for name to create a new folder in the current Lister
FROMCLIPBOARD/S		Create a new folder using the text on the clipboard as the name
INLINE/S		Create a new folder in inline rename mode
NAME/M	<filenames>	Create one or more folders with specified names (supports fully qualified paths)
NOUPDATESETTINGS/S		Prevents update of default settings by this invocation of the Create Folder command
READAUTO/O	<no parameters>	Automatically read the newly created folder into the current Lister
	dual	Automatically read new folder into dual file-display
	no	Don’t automatically read the new folder
	tab	Read folder into a new Folder Tab
	focus	Use with tab to prevent the new Folder Tab from becoming active
Delete
<no parameters>		Delete all selected files and folders (to recycle bin depending on Preferences settings)
ALL/S		Delete all files without prompting for each
FILE/M	<filenames>	Specify the files to delete
FILTER/O	<no parameters>	Prompt for a file filter before deleting files
	shift	Prompt for filter if shift key is held down
	alt	Prompt for filter if alt key is held down
	ctrl	Prompt for filter if control key is held down
FORCE/S		Force files that are delete protected to be deleted
NOFROMFOCUS/S		Operate only on the source file display rather than the window with input focus (Folder Tree or a file display)
NORECYCLE/S		Don’t delete to the recycle bin (overrides Preferences settings)
QUIET/S		Suppress any confirmation or error dialogs
RECYCLE/S		Delete to the recycle bin (overrides Preferences settings)
REMOVECOLLECTION/S		Only in a File Collection; remove selected files from the current collection. The actual files themselves are not deleted.
SECURE/O	<no parameters>	Secure wipe selected files
	<# of wipes>	Secure wipe selected files the specified number of times
SHIFT/S		Mimics Explorer behavior when you click delete with the shift key held down. If ‘Use Recycle Bin’ is turned on in Preferences, files are not deleted to the recycle bin. If ‘Use Recycle Bin’ is not turned on, function acts as if ALL and FORCE parameters were specified.
Favorites
<no parameters>		Generates list of favorite folders
ADD/O	<no parameters>	Add folder to Favorites list, displays full path in Favorites list
	nameonly	Add folder to Favorites list, only displays folder name in Favorites list
EDIT/S		Edit Favorites list (opens Preferences window)
NEW/S		Favorites are opened in a new Lister
NEWTAB/O	<no parameters>	Open folder in a new Folder Tab
	nofocus	Prevent the new Folder Tab from becoming active
OPENINDEST/S		Favorites are opened in the destination file display
OPENINDUAL/S		Favorites are opened in the dual-display
OPENINLEFT/S		Favorites are opened in the left file display
OPENINRIGHT/S		Favorites are opened in the right file display
OPENINDUAL/S		Favorites are opened in the dual-display
PATH	<path>	With ADD specifies a path to add to the Favorites list. Without the ADD flag, specifies a partial string to match when generating Favorites list for display (e.g. specify C: and only folders containing C: will be displayed in the Favorites list)
SHOWICONS/S		Displays icons for generated Favorites list
SMART/O	<no parameters>	Generates list of top ten SmartFavorites folders
	<max #>	Generates list of SmartFavorites folder, maximum number specified
FileType
<no parameters>		<no action>
ACTION		Performs the specified file type action on the selected files. Valid actions are drop, dropshift, dropctrl, dropalt, dblclk, dblclkshift, dblclkctrl and dblclkalt
CONTEXTFORCE/S		Use with CONTEXTMENU to force context menu items to be displayed even if Windows context menus have been disabled in Preferences
CONTEXTMENU/O	<no parameters>	Displays the system context menu items for selected files and folders
	<CLSID>	Displays context menus from the specified context menu extension handler for selected files and folders
CONTEXTOPTIONS/K	<options>	Options for CONTEXTMENU
	windowsonly	Add all Windows context menu items
EDIT/S		Automatically displays the File Type editor for the selected file
FILE/K/M	<filenames>	Perform File Type action on specified files
NEW/K	<filetype>	Create a new file of the specified type (from Shell New menu)
NEWMENU/S		Displays the Shell New menu
OPENWITHMENU/S		Displays the Open With menu for selected files
SENDTOMENU/S		Displays the Send To menu for selected files
Find
<no parameters>		Displays the Find File dialog
CLEAR/S		Clears previous Find results before beginning new search
COLLNAME/K	<collection name>	Specify the results file collection name
COMPUTERS/S		Initiate Search for Computers function
CONTAINING/K	<text>	Search for files containing text
DELMODE/S		Sets Duplicate File Find into "delete mode"
DUPES/S		Search for Duplicate Files
FILTER/O	<no parameters>	Prompts for saved filter to use in search
	<filter name>	Use the specified filter to search for files
GOOGLE/S		Use the Google Desktop Search engine (if installed)
IN/K	<path>	Specify the path to search
MD5/S		Search for duplicate files using MD5 checksum
NAME	<filename pattern>	Specify the file to search for
RECURSE/O	<no parameters>	Search sub-folders
	no	Don’t search sub-folders
SEARCHZIP/S		Search ZIP files
GetSizes
<no parameters>		Calculate sizes of selected folders, or all folders if none are selected
NODESELECT/S		Does not deselect folders after calculating sizes. Only works if the Postpone file deselection option is enabled in Preferences.
Go
<no parameters>		<no action>
BACK/S		Go back in the history in the current Lister
BACKLIST/O	<no parameters>	Generate ‘back’ history list for current Lister
	noicons	Don’t display icons in history list
	keys	Assign keyboard shortcuts to history list items
CONNECT/S		Connect to a network drive
CURRENT/S		Read the current path, use in conjunction with the OPENWITHxxx flags to duplicate the current path in another Lister or file display
DESTPATH/S		Read the destination path, used to duplicate the current destination path in the same or a new Lister
DISCONNECT/S		Disconnect from a network drive
DRIVEBUTTONS/O	<no parameters>	Generates a list of all drives in the system
	+<drive letters>	Only display the specified drive letters, e.g. +cde
	-<drive letters>	Don’t display the specified drive letters, e.g. –abg
	fixed	Only fixed drives (hard disks)
	network	Only network drives
	cdrom	Only CD drives
	removable	Only removable drives
	ramdisk	Only RAM drives
	labels	Display disk labels in drives list
	noletters	Don’t not display drive letters
	multifunc	Create buttons with multiple functions (left button is OPENINLEFT, right button is OPENINRIGHT and middle button is NEW)
	multifunctabs	The same as multifunc except the left and right button functions open new Folder Tabs instead of new Listers
	lettersbeforelabels	Changes label display to show drive letter before the label rather than after (e.g. "C: Drive Label" rather than "Drive Label (C · ")
	offline	Only display offline (disconnected) network drives
	online	Only display online (connected) network drives
DUALPATH/K	<path>	Specify the path to read into the second file display at the same time
EXPANDTREE/S		Automatically expand the Folder Tree to display the contents of the new path
FORWARD/S		Move forwards in the history in the current Lister
FORWARDLIST/O	<no parameters>	Generate ‘forwards’ history list for current Lister
	noicons	Don’t display icons in history list
	keys	Assign keyboard shortcuts to history list items
FROMSEL/S		Use the currently selected folder as the path to read
FTP/S		FTP Quick Connect
FTPSITE/K	<site name>	Go to an FTP site (name from the FTP Address Book)
FTPSITEICONS/S		Display icons for FTP sites in the site list (use with FTPSITELIST)
FTPSITELIST/O	<no parameters>	Generate list of FTP sites (from the FTP Address Book)
	<folder name>	Generate list of FTP sites under the specified folder in the Address Book
HISTORYLIST/O	<no parameters>	Generate combined ‘back’ and ‘forwards’ history list for the current Lister
	noicons	Don’t display icons in history list
	keys	Assign keyboard shortcuts to history list items
LASTACTIVELISTER/S		Activate and bring to the front the last active Lister
LAYOUT/K	<layout name>	Opens a new Lister from the specified Layout, and then reads the specified path into it.
NEW/O	<no parameters>	Open a new Lister
	<position and size>	Opens a new Lister with the specified position and size (x,y,w,h)
	max	Maximize new Lister
	min	Minimize new Lister
	norm	Display new Lister as normal (not minimized or maximized)
	source	Make new Lister the source
	dest	Make new Lister the destination
	lockoff	Lock the new Lister as "off"
	tree	Open Folder Tree in new Lister
	notree	Hide Folder Tree in new Lister
	dual	New Lister opens in dual display mode vertical
	dualhoriz	New Lister opens in dual display mode horizontal
	nodual	New Lister opens in single display mode
	viewpane	Display Viewer Pane in new Lister
	noviewpane	Don’t display Viewer Pane in new Lister
	findpanel	Display Utility Panel in Find mode
	syncpanel	Display Utility Panel in Synchronize mode
	dupepanel	Display Utility Panel in Duplicate File Finder mode
	noutilitypanel	Don’t display Utility Panel in new Lister
NEWTAB/O	<no parameters>	Opens a new Folder Tab
	nofocus	Prevents the new Folder Tab from becoming active
OPENCONTAINER/O	<no parameters>	Opens the "container" (parent folder) of the selected item
	target	Opens the containing folder of the target of any selected shortcuts
OPENINDEST/S		Read path in the destination file display or Lister
OPENINDUAL/O	<no parameters>	Read path into the ‘other’ file display (switches Lister to dual mode if not already)
	horiz	Specify horizontal dual display mode
	vert	Specify vertical dual display mode
OPENINLEFT/S		Read path into the left-hand file display
OPENINRIGHT/O	<no parameters>	Read path into the right-hand file display (switches Lister to dual mode if not already)
	horiz	Specify horizontal dual display mode
	vert	Specify vertical dual display mode
PATH	<path>	Specify the path to read. This can be any path that Opus understands, including local drives, UNC paths, ftp:// and coll:// paths, and ZIP files. You can specify an FTP site from the Address Book with @<sitename>. You can also use any valid Opus folder alias (e.g. /desktop) or an environment variable (e.g. %windir%)
PATHENTRY/O	<no parameters>	Displays "pop-up" path entry field (most useful if bound to a hotkey)
	left	Path entry field reads path into left-hand file display
	right	Path entry field reads path into right-hand file display
	dest	Path entry field reads path into destination Lister or file display
REFRESH/O	<no parameters>	Refresh current folder display
	tree	Refresh the Folder Tree
	both	Refresh both left and right file displays
	all	Refresh both left and right file displays and the Folder Tree
	source	Refresh source file display and the Folder Tree
	viewpane	Refresh the Viewer Pane
REFRESHTHUMBS/O	<no parameters>	Refresh display of thumbnails in the current folder
	shift	Refresh thumbnails display only if shift key is held down
	alt	Refresh thumbnails display only if alt key is held down
	ctrl	Refresh thumbnails display only if control key is held down
ROOT/O	<no parameters>	Go to the root of the current folder
	collapse	Go to the root of the current folder and collapse the Folder Tree
SWAP/S		Swap the folders displayed in the source and destination
TABCLOSE/S		Close the current Folder Tab
TABCLOSEALL/O	<no parameters>	Close all Folder Tabs except the current one
	left	Close all Folder Tabs to the left of the current one
	right	Close all Folder Tabs to the right of the current one
TABDUPLICATE/O	<no parameters>	Duplicate the current Folder Tab
	dual	Duplicate the current Folder Tab in the dual display
TABGROUPLIST/O	<no parameters>	Generate a list of saved Folder Tab Groups
	keys	Auto-assign keyboard shortcuts to list of Tab Groups
	noicons	Display icons for the list of Tab Groups
TABGROUPLOAD/K	<group name>	Load the named Folder Tab Group
TABGROUPSAVE/O	<no parameters>	Save current tabs as a new Tab Group, prompt for name
	<group name>	Save current tabs as specified Tab Group
TABMOVE/S		Move active tab to other side of Lister
TABSELECT/K	first	Select first Folder Tab
	last	Select last Folder Tab
	+1	Select next Folder Tab
	-1	Select previous Folder Tab
	prev	Select previously selected Folder Tab
	<index>	Select specified Folder Tab by index
UP/S		Go Up from the current folder (reads the parent folder)
USER/K	<user name>	Used with the Folder Alias system to read a folder belonging to a specified user (e.g. Go /desktop USER=Leo)
VIEW/K	<view mode>	Specify the view mode to display the new folder in. Valid view modes are largeicons, smallicons, list, details, power and thumbnails.
Help
<no parameters>		Displays main help page
ABOUT/S		Displays About Directory Opus dialog
CHECKUPDATE/O	<no parameters>	Check for updates
	quiet	Check for updates (quietly, with no dialog displayed unless an update is available)
LICENCEMANAGER/S		Display the Licence Manager
NEWEMAIL/S		Use simple built-in email client to send a new email message
TOPICS/S		Displays help topics index
Image
<no parameters>		<no action>
ADDSUFFIX/S		Adds a suffix to the filename appropriate to the new size of the image
AS/K	<output filename>	Specify a different output filename
BACKGROUND/K	<color>	Specify background color when converting alpha-channel images (either #RRGGBB in hex or RRR,GGG,BBB in decimal)
CONVERT/O	<no parameters>	Displays Image Conversion dialog
	jpg	Convert to JPEG format
	png	Convert to PNG format
	gif	Convert to GIF format
	bmp	Convert to BMP format
HEIGHT/K/N	<height>	Resize to specified height
HERE/S		Output files to source directory
NOENLARGE/S		Prevent enlarging of images
NOREDUCE/S		Prevent reducing of images
PRESERVEASPECTRATIO/S		Preserve aspect ratio when resizing
PRESERVEDATE/S		Preserve original file dates when converting in-place
QUALITY/K/N	<quality>	Specify quality for JPEG conversion
REPLACE/S		Replace existing files
ROTATE/K	<angle>	Rotate by specified angle (in degrees)
	EXIF	Rotate using information from EXIF tags
TO/K	<output path>	Specify output path, default is destination directory
WIDTH/K/N	<width>	Resize to specified width
Join
<no parameters>		Display the Join dialog to join selected files together
FROM/M/F	<filenames>	Specify the files to join
TO/K	<output file>	Specify the output file to join to
Marker
<no parameters>		<no action>
ID/K/N	<command ID>	Send a command directly to the system namespace currently displayed in the Lister
MENU/K	<menu type>	Marks the place for system namespace menus to appear. Valid menu types are File, Edit, View, Tools, Help, Other and All
TOOLBAR/S		Marks the place for system namespace toolbar buttons to appear
Play
<no parameters>		Plays all selected files (sequentially)
FILE	<filename>	Specify the file to play
QUIET/S		Plays file(s) without displaying the Play dialog
Prefs
<no parameters>		Displays the Preferences dialog
ADDBACKGROUND/S		Adds the selected files to the Preferences Images list (so they can be used as Lister and Toolbar background images)
ADDFTPSITE/S		Adds the current FTP site to the FTP Address Book
CUSTOMIZE/S		Displays the Customize dialog
EXPORT/S		Export the current Preferences settings
EXPORTDESC/K		Assign a description to an exported settings file
EXPORTSETTINGS/O		Export complete Opus settings – with no parameter default options are using. Valid parameters are all, filetypes, filters, images, toolbars, alltoolbars,prefs, noftppass, and sounds. Specify quiet to perform the export with no messages displayed (in conjunction with TO parameter)
FILETYPES/S		Displays the File Types dialog
FTPSITES/S		Displays the FTP Address Book (FTP section in Preferences)
IMPORT/O	<no parameters>	Import a saved Preferences file (displays Open File dialog)
	<filename>	Import the specified Preferences file
IMPORTEXPORT/S		Displays the Settings Export and Import dialog
IMPORTFLAGS/K	<import sections>	Specify the Preferences section to import when used with the IMPORT option. Valid sections are toolbars, formats, ftp, hotkeys, layouts, misc, faves, sounds and commands.
	Quiet	Import without displaying any confirmation dialogs
IMPORTLIST/S		Generates a list of exported Preferences files
IMPORTSETTINGS/O		Modifies the IMPORT parameter to import a settings file instead of a Preferences file. By default all settings are imported – valid arguments are filetypes, replacefiletypes, filters, replacefilters, images, replaceimages, toolbars, replacetoolbars, prefs, sounds, replacesounds and replaceall. Specify quiet to perform the import with no messages displayed.
IMPORTSETTINGSLIST/S		Generates a list of exported settings files
KEYS/S		Displays the Keys page of the Customize dialog
LAYOUT/K	<layout name>	Load the specified Lister Layout
LAYOUTCLOSELISTERS/O	<no parameters>	When loading a new Layout with the LAYOUT option, closes existing Lister based on the option in Preferences
	yes	Closes all existing Lister (overrides Preferences option)
	no	Does not close all existing Lister
LAYOUTEDIT/S		Displays the Lister Layouts page in Preferences
LAYOUTLIST/S		Generates a list of saved Lister Layouts
LAYOUTNAME/K	<layout name>	Used with LAYOUTSAVE to specify the Layout name
LAYOUTSAVE/O	<no parameters>	Save all open Lister as a new Lister Layout
	single	Save only the active Lister as a new Lister Layout
LAYOUTTHISLISTER/O	<no parameters>	In conjunction with the LAYOUT parameter, this option lets you apply the settings from a saved Lister Layout to the active Lister, rather than opening a new Lister. By default all settings from the saved Layout are applied.
	size	Only take the size settings from the saved Layout
	pos	Only take the position settings from the saved Layout
	paths	Only take the path settings from the saved Layout
PAGE/K	<page name>	Displays the Preferences dialog showing the specified page. Valid page names are display, settings, config, fileops, logging, faves, zip, sounds, misc, ftp, doubleclick, toolbars, startup, folders and plugins. You can also specify a "sub-page" by tab-number. For example, Prefs PAGE display,1 would display the second tab in the Display section.
PASSWORD/K	<password>	Place a password on an exported settings file
SETDEFAULTLISTER/S		Sets the active Lister as the new Default Lister
SHOWICONS/S		Displays icons for items in lists generated by the IMPORTLIST, LAYOUTLIST and other parameters
STYLE/K	<style name>	Apply the specified Lister Style to the current Lister
STYLEEDIT/S		Display the Lister Styles page of the Preferences dialog
STYLELIST/S		Generate a list of saved Lister Styles
STYLESAVE/O	<no parameters>	Save the current Lister as a new Lister Style
	<style name>	Specify the name of the Style to save
THEMES/S		Display the Lister Themes dialog
TO/K	<file name>	Specify name of exported settings file
TOOLBARS/S		Displays the Toolbars page of the Customize dialog
VFSPLUGINABOUT/K	<plugin name>	Display the About dialog for the specified VFS Plugin
VFSPLUGINCONFIG/K	<plugin name>	Display the Configuration dialog for the specified VFS Plugin
VFSPLUGINDISABLE/K	<no parameters>	Toggle the enable/disable state of the specified VFS Plugin
	enable	Enable the specified VFS Plugin
	disable	Disable the specified VFS Plugin
VFSPLUGINLIST/S		Generate a list of installed VFS Plugins
VFSPLUGINMANAGER/S		Display the VFS Plugins page of the Preferences dialog
Properties
<no parameters>		Displays the Properties dialog for selected files
FILE	<file name>	Displays the Properties for the specified file
FOLDEROPTIONS/S	<no parameters>	Displays the Folder Options dialog for the current folder
FORMATLIST/S		Displays a list of your configured Favorite Formats
FTPSITE/S		Displays the Properties for the current FTP site
LISTER/S		Displays the Properties dialog for the folder displayed in the current Lister
NOFROMFOCUS/S		Operate only on the source file display rather than the window with input focus (Folder Tree or a file display)
ROTATE/K	<angle>	Rotate selected thumbnails by the specified angle. The images themselves are not modified.
	menu	Displays thumbnail rotation menu
SETWALLPAPER/O	<no parameters>	Sets the currently selected image file as the desktop wallpaper
	center	Sets image as centered desktop wallpaper
	tile	Sets image as tiled desktop wallpaper
	stretch	Sets image as stretched desktop wallpaper
	menu	Displays Set Wallpaper sub-menu
SINGLE/S		When multiple files are selected, this option causes an individual Properties window to be opened for each file. The default behavior is for a "combined" Properties window for all selected files
Print
<no parameters>		Prints selected files (supported graphics formats, or files with a registered print handler). Under Windows XP, image files will be passed to the system Photo Printing Wizard.
DEFAULTLIST/S		Generates a list of your installed printers, letting you change the default printer
FOLDER/O	<no parameters>	Prints a listing of the contents of the current folder
	selected	Prints a listing of the selected files in the current folder
SETDEFAULT/K	<printer name>	Selects the specified printer as the default
TO/K	<printer name>	Prints selected files to the specified printer
Recent
<no parameters>		Generates a list of recently visited folders
CLEAR/S		Clears the Recent list
NEW/S		Recent folders are opened in a new Lister
NEWTAB/O	<no parameters>	Open folder in a new Folder Tab
	nofocus	Prevent the new Folder Tab from becoming active
OPENINDEST/S		Recent folders are opened in the destination file display
OPENINDUAL/S		Recent folders are opened in the dual-display
OPENINLEFT/S		Recent folders are opened in the left file display
OPENINRIGHT/S		Recent folders are opened in the right file display
PATH		A partial string to match the generated recent list to. For example, specify C: and only folders containing C: will be displayed in the recent list
SHOWICONS/S		Display icons for the generated recent list
Rename
<no parameters>		Display the Rename dialog, allowing you to rename selected files and folders
ADVANCED/S		Display the Rename dialog in advanced mode
AUTORENAME/S		Automatically rename files when new names clash with existing files
BY/K/N	<increment>	Specify the increment used when automatically numbering files
CASE/K	upper	Make filenames all upper-case
	lower	Make filenames all lower-case
	firstword	Capitalize the first word of the filename
	allwords	Capitalize all words in the filename
	extupper	Make filename extensions upper-case
	extlower	Make filename extensions lower-case
FINDREP/O	<no parameters>	Perform rename in Find & Replace mode
	ext	Find & Replace applies to filename extension as well as filename stem
FROM	<filename or wildcard pattern>	Specify the file to rename or a wildcard pattern
INLINE/O	<no parameters>	Activate inline rename mode for the currently focused item
	all	Automatically select the entire filename
	name	Automatically select the filename stem
	ext	Automatically select the filename extension
	home	Automatically position the cursor at the beginning
	end	Automatically position the cursor at the end
MATCHCASE/S		Wildcard rename is to be case sensitive
NUMBER/O	<no parameters>	Automatically number files beginning from 1
	<starting number>	Automatically number files beginning from the specified number. Prefix the number with zeroes to specify zero padding (e.g. 00005 will start numbering from 5, padded to 5 places)
PATTERN/K	<wildcard pattern>	Specify a wildcard pattern for the source files
PRESET/K	<preset name>	Rename using the specified preset
	regexp	Open Rename dialog in regular expression mode
	findrep	Open Rename dialog in Find & Replace mode
RECURSE/S		Rename all files within selected sub-folders that match the wildcard pattern
REGEXP/S		Perform rename in Regular Expression mode
SIMPLE/S		Display the Rename dialog in simple mode
TO	<filename or wildcard pattern>	Specify the new name of the file or the wildcard pattern
TYPE/K	files	Only rename files
	dirs	Only rename folders
Select
<no parameters>		Display the Select dialog, allowing you to select files by wildcard pattern
ADVANCED/S		Display the Select dialog in advanced mode
ALL/S		Select all files and folders in the source Lister
ALLDIRS/S		Select or deselect all folders
ALLFILES/S		Select or deselect all files
DESELECT/S		Deselect matching files instead of selecting them
DESELECTNOMATCH/S		Deselect any files that don’t match the pattern
DESTTOSOURCE/S		Select any files in the source folder that are currently selected in the destination folder
FILTER/S		The PATTERN specified is actually the name of a predefined filter to use to select files
FILTERFLAGS/K	select	Used with FILTER to specify that matching files are to be selected
	deselect	Matching files are to be deselected
	hide	Matching files are to be hidden
	hidenomatch	Non-matching files are to be hidden
FIRST/S		Select the first item in the folder
HIDESEL/S		Hide all selected files
HIDEUNSEL/S		Hide all non-selected files
INVERT/S		Invert the selection status of all items in the Lister
MAKEVISIBLE/S		Ensure the first matching file is visible (scrolls display if needed)
NEXT/S		Select the next item in the folder
NONE/S		Deselect all files and folders
NOPATTERN/S		Used with HIDESEL and HIDEUNSEL to hide selected or unselected files immediately without displaying the Select dialog
PATTERN	<wildcard pattern>	Specify a wildcard pattern to use (does not display Select dialog)
PREV/S		Select the previous item in the folder
RESELECT/S		Reselect files used by the last function
SHOWHIDDEN/S		Reveal any files that have been hidden
SIMPLE/S		Display the Select dialog in simple mode
SOURCETODEST/S		Select any files in the destination folder that are currently selected in the source folder
TYPE/K	files	Operation only affects files
	dirs	Operation only affects folders
Set
<no parameters>		<no action>
AUTOSIZECOLUMNS/S		Automatically size all displayed columns in a details or Power mode Lister
CHECKBOXMODE/K	on / off / toggle	Turn checkbox mode on or off, or toggle its current state
COLUMNS/K	<columns>	Set the display to use the specified columns
COLUMNSADD/K	<columns>	Add the specified columns to the current display
COLUMNSREMOVE/K	<columns>	Remove the specified columns from the current display
COLUMNSTOGGLE/K	<columns>	Toggle the specified columns in the current display
	columnlist	Generates a categorized list of available columns
CONTENTFORMAT/K	<content type>	Set the current Lister to use the named content type format
COPYFILTER/K	on / off / toggle	Turn the copy filter on or off, or toggle its current state
DELFILTER/K	on / off / toggle	Turn the delete filter on or off, or toggle its current state
DUAL/K	on / off / toggle	Turn dual display mode on or off, or toggle its current state
	horiz	Set dual display mode horizontal
	vert	Set dual display mode vertical
	togglelayout	Toggle the current dual display layout
	source	If going into dual display mode, the new display will become the source
	dest	The new display will become the destination
FILTERS/K	on / off / toggle	Turn both copy and delete filters on or off, or toggle their current state
FLATVIEW/K	on / off / toggle	Turn Flat View on or off, or toggle its current state
	grouped	Turn on Flat View Grouped mode
	mixed	Turn on Flat View Mixed mode
	mixednofolders	Turn on Flat View Mixed No Folders mode
FORMAT/K	<format name>	Set the current Lister to use the named Favorite Format
FORMATLOCK/K	on / off / toggle	Turn the format lock on or off, or toggle its current state
FTPMODE/K	ascii	Set the transfer mode for the current FTP connection to ASCII
	binary	Set transfer mode to binary
	auto	Set transfer mode to automatic
HIDE/S		You can add this flag to most Set commands to cause them to be hidden when unavailable rather than appear disabled
HIDEFILTERATTR/O	<no parameters>	Clear the current Hide Files attribute filter
	<attributes>	Set the Hide Files attribute filter for the current folder. Valid attributes are RAHSEC.
HIDEFILTERFILENAME/O	<no parameters>	Clear the current Hide Files filename filter
	<filename pattern>	Set the Hide Files filename pattern for the current folder
HIDEFILTERFOLDERS/O	<no parameters>	Clear the current Hide Folders filename filter
	<filename pattern>	Set the Hide Folders filename filter for the current folder
HIDESYSTEMFILES/K	on / off / toggle	Turn the Hide protected operating system files option on or off, or toggle its current state
LAYOUT/K	remember	Remember the layout of the current Lister in temporary memory
	restore	Restore the layout of the current Lister from temporary memory
LISTERCMD/K	minimize	Minimize the current Lister
	maximize	Maximize the current Lister
	restore	Restore the current Lister
	showall	Make all currently open Listers visible
	minimizeall	Minimize all currently open Listers
	tileh	Tile horizontally all open Listers
	tilev	Tile vertically all open Listers
	cascade	Cascade all open Listers
LISTERSIZE/K	<width,height >	Change the size of the current Lister. You can specify either an absolute size (e.g. 800,600) or supply delta values to make relative changes (e.g. +400,-300)
OUTPUT/K	on / off / toggle	Open or close the Output Window or toggle its current state
	find	Open the Output Window and display the Find tab
	undo	Open the Output Window and display the Undo tab
	log	Open the Output Window and display the Log tab
	test	Open the Output Window and display the Test tab
	ftp1	Open the Output Window and display the FTP1 tab
	ftp2	Open the Output Window and display the FTP2 tab
	email	Open the Output Window and display the Email tab
READONLY/K	on / off / toggle	Turn read only mode (for ZIP files) on or off or toggle its current state
SHOWFILTERATTR/O	<no parameters>	Clear the current Show Files attribute filter
	<attributes>	Set the Show Files attribute filter for the current folder. Valid attributes are RAHSEC.
SHOWFILTERFILENAME/O	<no parameters>	Clear the current Show Files filename filter
	<filename pattern>	Set the Show Files filename pattern for the current folder
SHOWFILTERFOLDERS/O	<no parameters>	Clear the current Show Folders filename filter
	<filename pattern>	Set the Show Folders filename filter for the current folder
SORTBY/K	<column names>	Set the sort field for the current Lister. You can specify multiple columns by separating them with commas.
SORTGROUPDUPES/K	on / off / toggle	Turn on or off the Group duplicates option for the current folder, or toggle its current state
SORTNUMERIC/K	on / off / toggle	Turn on or off the Numeric order filename sorting option for the current folder, or toggle its current state
SORTORDER/K	folders	Set the sort order in the current Lister to folders before files
	files	Sort files before folders
	mixed	Mix files and folders together
	cycle	Cycle through the available sort methods
SORTREVERSE/K	on / off / toggle	Turn on or off reverse sorting or toggle its current state
SORTWORDS/K	on / off / toggle	Turn on or off the Word sort option or toggle its current state
SOUNDS/K	on / off / toggle	Enable or disable Directory Opus sound effects, or toggle the current state of this option
STATE/K	source	Set the current Lister (or file display) to be the source
	dest	Set the current Lister to be the destination
	lockoff	Lock the current Lister in an off state
STATUSBAR/K	on / off / toggle	Turn on or off the status bar in the current Lister, or toggle its current state
TREE/K	on / off / toggle	Turn on or off the Folder Tree in the current Lister, or toggle its current state. In a dual display mode Lister with the Automatically open second Folder Tree option enabled, both Folder Trees will open or close.
	left	Modifies the on, off or toggle options to specifically control the left Folder Tree in a dual display Lister
	right	Modifies the on, off or toggle options to specifically control the right Folder Tree in a dual display Lister
	dual	Modifies the on, off or toggle options to specifically control both Folder Trees in a dual display Lister
UTILITY/K	on / off / toggle	Open or close the Utility Panel in the current Lister or toggle its current state
	find	Open the Utility Panel and display the Find page
	sync	Open the Utility Panel and display the Synchronize page
	dupe	Open the Utility Panel and display the Duplicate File Finder page
	horiz	Display the Utility Panel in horizontal layout
	vert	Display the Utility Panel in vertical layout
	togglelayout	Toggle the layout of the Utility Panel
VIEW/K	<view mode>	Set the view mode of the current Lister. Valid view modes are largeicons, smallicons, list, details, power or thumbnails.
	cycle	Cycle through the view modes in the current Lister
VIEWPANE/K	on / off / toggle	Open or close the Lister Viewer Pane or toggle its current state
	horiz	Display the Viewer Pane in horizontal layout
	vert	Display the Viewer Pane in vertical layout
	togglelayout	Toggle the layout of the Viewer Pane
VIEWPANESIZE/K	<size>	Set the size of the Viewer Pane as a percentage of the size of the current Lister. You can specify two sizes separated by commas to toggle between the two.
WINMSGR/K	on / off / toggle	Open or close the Lister Contacts List, or toggle its current state
SetAttr
<no parameters>		Displays the Set Time & Attributes dialog for selected files
ATTR/K	<attributes>	Specify absolute attribute setting for selected files. Valid attributes are h (hidden), s (system), a (archived) and r (read-only)
CLEARATTR/K	<attributes>	Specify attributes to turn off for selected files
CREATED/K	<datetime>	Specify creation date and time for selected files
DESCRIPTION/O	<no parameters>	Displays the Set Description dialog for selected files
	<description>	Set the description of selected files to the supplied text
FILTER/K	<filter name>	Specify a filter for recursively setting attributes and timestamps on files in sub-folders
MODIFIED/K	<datetime>	Specify last modified date and time for selected files
RECURSE/S		Make changes to files in sub-folders
SETATTR/K	<attributes>	Specify attributes to turn on for selected files
TOGGLEATTR/K	<attributes>	Specify attributes to toggle for selected files
Show
<no parameters>		Displays selected files with the Opus Image Viewer
FILE	<filename>	Specify name of the file to show
NOUSEEXISTING/S		Prevent the use of existing viewer windows
PLUGIN/K	<plugin name>	Specify the name of the Viewer Plugin to use
PLUGINABOUT/K	<plugin name>	Display the About dialog for the specified Viewer Plugin
PLUGINCONFIG/K	<plugin name>	Display the Configuration dialog for the specified Viewer Plugin
PLUGINDISABLE/O	<no parameters>	Used with the PLUGIN parameter to toggle the enable state of the specified Viewer Plugin on or off
	enable	Enables the specified Viewer Plugin
	disable	Disables the specified Viewer Plugin
PLUGINLIST/S		Generates a list of the installed Viewer Plugins
PLUGINMANAGER/S		Display the Viewer Plugins page of the Preferences dialog
USEEXISTING/S		Force Opus to re-use an existing viewer window
Split
<no parameters>		Display the Split dialog to split selected files
Toolbar
<no parameters>		<no action>
CLOSE/S		Close the toolbar specified by the NAME parameter (if it is currently open)
IMPORT/S		Import a toolbar file into your Opus configuration
LINE/K	<line>[,<pos>]	Specify the line number and optional position to display the new Toolbar
LIST/S		Generate a list of toolbars
LOCAL/S		The specified toolbar will be opened locally for the current Lister rather than for all Lister
NAME	<toolbar name>	Specify the name of the toolbar to open or close
POS/K	<x,y>	Specify the position on screen to open a floating toolbar
	mouse	Open a floating toolbar centered over the mouse pointer
	mousel	Open a floating toolbar left-aligned with the mouse pointer
	mouser	Open a floating toolbar right-aligned with the mouse pointer
STATE/K	<no parameters>	Position the toolbar at the top of the Lister
	bottom	Position the toolbar at the bottom of the Lister
	left	Position the toolbar at the left of the Lister
	right	Position the toolbar at the right of the Lister
	center	Position the toolbar in the center of the Lister (between the two file displays)
	viewpane	Position the toolbar between the Viewer Pane and the file display
	tree	Position the toolbar between the Folder Tree and the file display
	float	Float the toolbar free of the Lister
TOGGLE/S		Toggle the specified toolbar on or off
Undo
<no parameters>		Undo the last action if it is undoable, otherwise no action
ITEM/K	<item number>	Undo a specified item in the undo list (by number)
LIST/S		Generate list of undoable actions
LISTMENU/S		Generate a drop-down list of undoable actions
PAGE/S		Display the Undo page in the Output Window